cs 230 carbon sulphur

420
INSTRUCTION MANUAL LECO Corporation 3000 Lakeview Avenue • St. Joseph, MI 49085-2396 Phone: 269-983-5531 • Fax: 269-983-3850 [email protected] • www.leco.com • ISO-9001 • No. FM 24045 LECO is a registered trademark of LECO Corporation. Software Version DSP 1.0x Windows 1.0x Part Number 200-297 December 2005 Patents are Pending in U.S.A. and other countries © 2005 LECO Corporation Minor revisions may not be reflected in this manual. CS230 Carbon/Sulfur Determinator

Upload: fizikochem

Post on 21-Apr-2015

279 views

Category:

Documents


9 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

LECO Corporation

Software Version DSP 1.0x Windows 1.0xPart Number 200-297

December 2005Patents are Pending in U.S.A. and other countries

© 2005 LECO CorporationMinor revisions may not be reflected in this manual.

CS230Carbon/SulfurDeterminator

3000 Lakeview Avenue • St. Joseph, MI 49085-2396Phone: 269-983-5531 • Fax: 269-983-3850

[email protected] • www.leco.com • ISO-9001 • No. FM 24045LECO is a registered trademark of LECO Corporation.

Page 2: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–2 CS230 Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 3: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–3

1 1 Introduction

1 Introduction

Illustrations .......................................................................1–8 Symbols.......................................................................... 1–12 Interference to Other Devices ............................................ 1–14 Declaration of Conformity .................................................. 1–15 Major Equipment and Accessories List ................................. 1–17 Components and Accessories List........................................ 1–26 Options........................................................................... 1–33 Specifications................................................................... 1–34

2 Installation

Illustrations .......................................................................2–2 Instrument Installation........................................................2–3 Facility Requirements..........................................................2–6 International Installation .....................................................2–7

3 Option Installation

Illustrations .......................................................................3–2 Balance Installation ............................................................3–3 Dot Matrix Printer (601-480-110) .........................................3–7 Deskjet (Inkjet) Printer (611-499-110)................................ 3–11 Installation of Optional Kits for the Autocleaner .................... 3–12 Quick Loader and Quick Feeder Operation ............................ 3–13

4 System Setup

Illustrations .......................................................................4–4 Controls and Indicators .......................................................4–6 Menu Organization Chart .....................................................4–8 Power-Up ........................................................................ 4–10

Introduction

Page 4: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–4 CS230 Introduction

System Overview ............................................................. 4–15 System Check.................................................................. 4–16 System Setup .................................................................. 4–18 Analysis Method Menu....................................................... 4–32 Data Transmit.................................................................. 4–35 System Setup for Windows® .............................................. 4–38 Illustrations ..................................................................... 4–41 Controls and Indicators ..................................................... 4–42 Automatically Transmit Analysis Results............................... 4–44 Configure Maintenance Counters......................................... 4–46 Configure the Analysis Report ............................................ 4–48 Configure the Screen ........................................................ 4–50 Configure the Spreadsheet................................................. 4–51 Method Development ........................................................ 4–53 Sample Templates ............................................................ 4–56 Standards ....................................................................... 4–57 System Configuration........................................................ 4–59 Set Barometric Pressure .................................................... 4–63 Transmission Formats ....................................................... 4–64 Preview Transmitted Data.................................................. 4–71 Select Language............................................................... 4–73 Users.............................................................................. 4–74 Sample Filters.................................................................. 4–77 User Defined Fields........................................................... 4–81

5 Operation

Operation Guidelines...........................................................5–6 Crucibles...........................................................................5–9 Sample Preparation .......................................................... 5–10 Analyze Menu .................................................................. 5–11 Sample Weight Entry ........................................................ 5–23 Sample Analysis ............................................................... 5–25 Calibrate Menu................................................................. 5–27 Results Menu ................................................................... 5–38 Operation for Windows® .................................................... 5–47 Windows Software Menus .................................................. 5–52

Page 5: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–5

Login a Sample ................................................................ 5–63 Analyze a Sample............................................................. 5–68 Pause / Delay Analysis ...................................................... 5–69 Delete a Sample............................................................... 5–71 Print Sample Results ......................................................... 5–72 Transmit ......................................................................... 5–74 Recalculate Result ............................................................ 5–75 Calibration....................................................................... 5–76 Blank Calibration .............................................................. 5–77 Standard Calibration ......................................................... 5–78 Drift Correction ................................................................ 5–81 Data Management ............................................................ 5–83 Export Data ..................................................................... 5–86 Import Data .................................................................... 5–95 Transmit Selected Samples ................................................ 5–96 Clipboard Use .................................................................. 5–97 Configure Result Plot......................................................... 5–98

6 Maintenance

Illustrations .......................................................................6–2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule .............................................6–3 Anhydrone Tube.................................................................6–4 Autocleaner .......................................................................6–6 Catalyst Heater Tube Packing............................................. 6–11 Cellulose Filter ................................................................. 6–13 Combustion Tube ............................................................. 6–15 Combustion Zone O-rings .................................................. 6–16 Incoming Reagent Tube..................................................... 6–17 Lance and Filter Assembly ................................................. 6–19 Pinch Valve Tubing ........................................................... 6–21 Reagent Tube Screen Filter ................................................ 6–23 Login Periodic Maintenance ................................................ 6–24 View Log File ................................................................... 6–25 Reset Maintenance Counters .............................................. 6–26

Page 6: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–6 CS230 Introduction

7 Theory of Operation

Illustrations .......................................................................7–2 General Information............................................................7–3 Infrared Radiation, Absorption, and Detection.........................7–4 Comparator Level ...............................................................7–8

8 Diagnostics

Diagnostics........................................................................8–4 Ambient Monitor.................................................................8–5 Switch States.....................................................................8–8 Valve States ......................................................................8–9 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–10 Print Buffer...................................................................... 8–12 Plot Buffer ....................................................................... 8–13 System Print.................................................................... 8–15 Reset Memory.................................................................. 8–16 Diagnostics for Windows® .................................................. 8–17 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–19 Ambient Monitor............................................................... 8–22 Switches ......................................................................... 8–26 Comport.......................................................................... 8–28

9 Electronic Adjustments

Illustrations .......................................................................9–2 Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Adjustment ....................9–3 Catalyst Heater Control Card................................................9–5 Induction Power Control Card...............................................9–7 Oven Heater Control Card.................................................. 9–10 IR Cell ............................................................................ 9–11

10 Service

Illustrations ..................................................................... 10–2 Combustion Pressure Adjustment ....................................... 10–3 Flow Controller Adjustment................................................ 10–5 Safety Pressure Adjustments.............................................. 10–6 Vertical Crucible Alignment ................................................ 10–8

Page 7: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–7

Gas Flows...................................................................... 10–12 Valve Control States ....................................................... 10–16 Notices, Errors, and Warnings .......................................... 10–22 Software Upgrade........................................................... 10–26 Linearization with DSP..................................................... 10–30 Linearization with Windows® ............................................ 10–32

11 Illustrations

• The Illustrations chapter table of contents is listed on page 11-1.

12 Schematics

13 Index

Note

Page 8: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–8 CS230 Introduction

Illustrations

Figure 1-1 ......... CS230 Determinator .................................. 1–16 Figure 2-1 ......... Wiring Diagrams........................................ 2–8 Figure 2-2 ......... Interconnection Diagram ............................ 2–9 Figure 2-3 ......... Voltage Selection Terminal Strip .................. 2–11 Figure 2-4 ......... RF Shield Removal ..................................... 2–13 Figure 2-5 ......... Oscillator Chassis....................................... 2–13 Figure 2-6 ......... Anhydrone Tube ........................................ 2–15 Figure 2-7 ......... Reagent Tube Removal............................... 2–17 Figure 2-8 ......... Reagent Tube Packing ................................ 2–17 Figure 2-9 ......... Combustion Tube Installation— Without Autocleaner.................................. 2–19 Figure 2-10 ....... Combustion Tube Installation— With Autocleaner....................................... 2–20 Figure 2-11 ....... Crucible Mounting Bracket........................... 2–22 Figure 2-12 ....... Shroud and Fan Assembly........................... 2–23 Figure 2-13 ....... Crucible Bucket Installation ......................... 2–24 Figure 2-14 ....... Pedestal Installation—Without Autocleaner .... 2–26 Figure 2-15 ....... Pedestal Installation—With Autocleaner......... 2–27 Figure 3-1 ......... Balance Control Panel................................. 3–6 Figure 3-2 ......... Balance Assembly ...................................... 3–6 Figure 3-3 ......... Ribbon Cartridge Installation ....................... 3–9 Figure 3-4 ......... Paper Installation....................................... 3–9 Figure 3-5 ......... Crucible Positions....................................... 3–14 Figure 4-1 ......... Controls and Indicators with Autocleaner....... 4–7 Figure 4-2 ......... Keypad .................................................... 4–11 Figure 4-3 ......... Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob......... 4–28 Figure 4-4 ......... Controls and Indicators............................... 4–43 Figure 6-1 ......... Anhydrone Tube ........................................ 6–5 Figure 6-2 ......... Autocleaner Assembly ................................ 6–8 Figure 6-3 ......... Catalyst Heater Tube Packing ...................... 6–12 Figure 6-4 ......... Cellulose Filter Packing ............................... 6–14 Figure 6-5 ......... Reagent Tube Removal............................... 6–18 Figure 6-6 ......... Reagent Tube Packing ................................ 6–18

Page 9: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–9

Figure 6-7 ......... Lance and Filter Assembly........................... 6–20 Figure 6-8 ......... Pinch Valve Assembly ................................. 6–22 Figure 7-1 ......... Gas Flow Diagram...................................... 7–6 Figure 7-2 ......... Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram.............. 7–7 Figure 9-1 ......... Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Card ..... 9–4 Figure 9-2 ......... Catalyst Heater Control Card ....................... 9–6 Figure 9-3 ......... Induction Power Control Card ...................... 9–9 Figure 9-4 ......... Oven Heater Control Card ........................... 9–10 Figure 9-5 ......... IR Cell Adjustment Location ........................ 9–12 Figure 10-1 ....... Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob......... 10–4 Figure 10-2 ....... Flow Controller Location.............................. 10–5 Figure 10-3 ....... Piston Pressure Regulator ........................... 10–7 Figure 10-4 ....... Crucible Alignment..................................... 10–11 Figure 10-5 ....... Gas Flow Diagram...................................... 10–17 Figure 10-6 ....... Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram.............. 10–18 Figure 10-7 ....... Leak Check Flow Diagram ........................... 10–19 Figure 10-8 ....... Leak Check Flow with Autocleaner Diagram ... 10–20 Figure 10-9 ....... Analyze Sequence Diagram ......................... 10–21 Figure 10-10...... EPROM Location......................................... 10–28 Figure 11-1 ....... Display Assembly....................................... 11–2 Figure 11-2 ....... Gas Panel Assembly ................................... 11–3 Figure 11-3 ....... Head Filter and Lance Assembly................... 11–4 Figure 11-4 ....... Dust Door Assembly................................... 11–5 Figure 11-5 ....... Power Supply Assembly .............................. 11–6 Figure 11-6 ....... Transformer Assembly................................ 11–7 Figure 11-7 ....... Flow Controller Assembly ............................ 11–8 Figure 11-8 ....... Oscillator Assembly.................................... 11–9 Figure 11-9 ....... Pinch Valve Assembly ................................. 11–10 Figure 11-10...... Quick Loader Pneumatic Manifold ................. 11–11 Figure 11-11...... Carousel Assembly..................................... 11–12 Figure 11-12...... Quick Feeder Arm Assembly ........................ 11–13 Figure 11-13...... Carousel Assembly..................................... 11–14 Figure 11-14...... Quick Feeder Arm Assembly ........................ 11–15 Figure 11-15...... Autocleaner Assembly ................................ 11–17 Figure 11-16...... Quick Loader Assembly............................... 11–18 Figure 11-17...... Quick Feeder Assembly............................... 11–19

Page 10: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–10 CS230 Introduction

Warranty

Equipment manufactured by LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan is warranted free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of six months from the date of installation. Equipment not manufactured by LECO is covered to the extent of warranty provided by the original manufacturer and this warranty does not cover any equipment, new or used, purchased from anyone other than LECO Corporation. All replacement parts shall be covered under warranty for a period of thirty days from date of purchase. LECO makes no other representation or warranty of any other kind, expressed or implied, with respect to the goods sold hereunder, whether as to merchantability, fitness for purpose, or otherwise.

Expendable items such as crucibles, combustion tubes, chemicals, and items of like nature are not covered by this warranty.

LECO's sole obligation under this warranty shall be to repair or replace any part or parts which, to our satisfaction, prove to be defective upon return prepaid to LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan. This obligation does not include labor to install replacement parts, nor does it cover any failure due to accident, abuse, neglect, or use in disregard of instructions furnished by LECO. In no event shall damages for defective goods exceed the purchase price of the goods, and LECO shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages whatsoever.

All claims in regard to the parts or equipment must be made within ten (10) days after Purchaser learns of the facts upon which the claim is based. Authorization must be obtained from LECO prior to returning any other parts. This warranty is voided by failure to comply with these notice requirements.

Page 11: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–11

Notice

The warranty on LECO equipment remains valid only when genuine LECO replacement parts are employed. Since LECO has no control over the quality or purity of consumable products not manufactured by LECO, the specifications for accuracy of results using LECO instruments are not guaranteed unless genuine LECO consumables are employed in conjunction with LECO instruments. If purchaser defaults in making payment for any parts or equipment, this warranty shall be void and shall not apply to such parts and equipment. No late payment or cure of default in payment shall extend the warranty period provided herein.

LECO Corporation is not responsible for damage to any associated instruments, equipment, or apparatus nor will LECO be held liable for loss of profit or other special damages resulting from abuse, neglect, or use in disregard of instructions. The Buyer, their employees, agents, and successors in interest assume all risks and liabilities for the operation, use, and/or misuse of the product(s) described herein and agree to indemnify, hold harmless, and defend the seller from any and all claims and actions arising from any cause whatsoever, including seller's negligence for personal injury incurred in connection with the use of said product(s) and any and all damages proximately resulting therefrom.

Caution

The instrument should be operated only by technically qualified individuals who have fully read and understand these instructions. The instrument should be operated only in accordance with these instructions.

The operator should follow all of the warnings and cautions set forth in the manual and the operator should follow and employ all applicable standard laboratory safety procedures.

LECO is a registered trademark of LECO Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Page 12: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–12 CS230 Introduction

Symbols

Warning and Caution

The following symbols may be found on LECO equipment or their components. These symbols indicate the use of specific safety guidelines. Important safety information is highlighted in this manual by one of the following symbols as well as WARNING and CAUTION statements. Operator and service personnel must follow these instructions for personal safety and to prevent damage to the equipment.

This symbol indicates a risk of electrical shock. Refer to the manual for specific instructions.

This symbol indicates a high temperature surface. Refer to the manual for specific instructions.

This symbol indicates a caution. Refer to the manual for specific instructions.

LECO equipment should be operated only by technically qualified individuals who have fully read and understand the instructions detailed in this manual. The equipment should be operated only in accordance with these instructions.

The operator should follow all of the warnings and cautions set forth in this manual and the operator should follow and employ all applicable standard laboratory safety procedures.

CAUTION

!

WARNING

WARNING

Page 13: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–13

About this Manual and the Instrument

The CS230 can be purchased with two different user interfaces. The first user interface has a display and keypad built-in. Control of the instrument is from the display and keypad. The second user interface is a Windows® program running on a PC that’s interfaced with the instrument. Control of the instrument is from the PC.

This manual contains procedures for both user interfaces. The built-in display and keypad instrument will be refer to as the CS230 DSP (Display) and the instrument controlled by a PC will be referred to as the CS230 Windows®. When a procedure is for a specific user interface the symbols shown below will appear next to the procedure.

User Interface (Software)

• This symbol indicates the information is for the keypad interface only. This instrument is referred to as the CS230 DSP. Refer to this manual for specific instructions.

• This symbol indicates the information is for the Windows software only. This instrument is referred to as the CS230 Windows®. Refer to this manual or the electronic manual for specific instructions.

Keypad

Windows®

Page 14: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–14 CS230 Introduction

Interference to Other Devices

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following methods:

• Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the radio or television receiver.

• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that which the radio or television receiver is currently connected.

• Consult the radio or television dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Page 15: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–15

Declaration of Conformity

Page 16: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–16 CS230 Introduction

With Keypad and Display (DSP)

Without Keypad and Display (Windows®)

Figure 1-1 CS230 Determinator

Page 17: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–17

Major Equipment and Accessories List

• Items listed below and repeated throughout this manual are subject to revision. Please consult the packing slip received with the instrument.

• For a complete listing of all Accessory, Component, Hazardous Material, and PC Tower packages, along with Software Kits, see Components and Accessories List beginning on page 1–26.

• The following units have a Display and Keypad built into the determinator. They do not include a PC.

CS230 Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display

1 619-000-100 CS230 Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-010-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230CH High Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display

1 619-000-500 CS230CH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 617-010-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Notes

Note

Page 18: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–18 CS230 Introduction

CS230CHH High Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display and Autocleaner

1 619-000-700 CS230CH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-030-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230CL Low Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display

1 619-100-100 CS230CL Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-010-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230CLH Low Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display and Autocleaner

1 619-100-300 CS230CL Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-030-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 19: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–19

CS230CSH High Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with Display

1 619-100-500 CS230CSH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-010-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230CSHH High Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with Display and Autocleaner

1 619-100-700 CS230CSH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-030-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230H Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with Display and Autocleaner

1 619-000-300 CS230 Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-030-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 20: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–20 CS230 Introduction

CS230SH Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with Display

1 619-200-100 CS230SH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-010-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

CS230SHH Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with Display and Autocleaner

1 619-200-300 CS230SH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-030-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 21: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–21

• The following units include a PC. They do not have a display and keypad built into the determinator.

CS230C Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC

1 619-000-200 CS230C Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-020-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

CS230HC Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC and Autocleaner

1 619-000-400 CS230 Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-040-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Note

Page 22: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–22 CS230 Introduction

CS230CHC High Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC

1 619-000-600 CS230 Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-020-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

CS230CHHC High Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC and Autocleaner

1 619-000-800 CS230CH

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-040-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-035 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 23: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–23

CS230CLC Low Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC

1 619-100-200 CS230CL Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-020-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 616-759 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

CS230CLHC Low Carbon/Sulfur Determinator with PC and Autocleaner

1 619-100-400 CS230CL Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-040-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 24: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–24 CS230 Introduction

CS230CSHC High Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with PC

1 619-100-600 CS230CSH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-020-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-050 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

CS230CSHHC High Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with PC and Autocleaner

1 619-100-800 CS230CSH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-040-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 25: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–25

CS230SHC Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with PC

1 617-200-200 CS230SH Determinator including:

1 200-297 Instruction Manual

1 619-020-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

CS230SHHC Carbon/High Sulfur Determinator with PC and Autocleaner

1 619-200-400 CS230SH Determinator including:

1 200-635 Instruction Manual

1 619-040-070 Component Pack

1 615-426 Power Cord

1 259-059 Software Kit

1 607-750* Hazardous Material Package

1 621-902 Accessory Pack

1 686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack

1 701-557 15.00 inch Color SVGA Monitor

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 26: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–26 CS230 Introduction

Components and Accessories List

259-059 Software Kit

1 159-164-100 Software Package

1 203-505-267 Software Registration Form

602-773 External Alarm Kit

1 602-773-901 External Alarm Kit Bulletin

1 767-228 Bag

1 769-299 Connector

2 776-118 Contact

1 802-151 Cable Clamp

607-750* Hazardous Material Pack

1 501-171 Anhydrone 10-20 Mesh (1 lb)

1 502-174 Lecosorb 20-30 Mesh (500gr)

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation. Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Page 27: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–27

621-902 Accessory Pack

1 501-077 Chip Accelerator

2 501-082 Wire Brush

1 501-241 Grease Vacuum (5.3 Oz)

1 501-587 Platinum Silica Catalyst

1 501-676 Steel Pin Sample

1 501-679 Steel Pin Sample

1 502-177 Fine Wool Quartz (50 gr)

1 502-294 Accelerator Lecocel 2

1 502-413 Cast Iron Powdered Sample

1 528-018-500 Low Carbon Crucible (500 Pk)

1 602-773 Alarm External Kit Connector

1 605-700-087 O-ring Package including:

2 601-920 O-ring (Combustion Tube)

2 762-058 O-ring (Lance Assembly)

2 765-976 O-ring (Anhydrone Tube)

5 772-520 O-ring (Reagent Tube Screen Filters)

2 772-738 O-ring (Reagent Tube Stationary Blocks)

1 619-880-100 Crucible Cover (100 Pk)

1 760-138 Tweezers

1 761-929 Crucible Tongs

1 764-098 Cellulose (1 lb)

1 773-579 Scoop SST Assembly

1 775-306 Secondary 10micron Filter

1 775-307 Thumb Screw

Page 28: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–28 CS230 Introduction

619-010-070 Component Pack

4 190-278 Screw

2 190-742 Screw

6 193-055 Flat Washer

1 550-080 Insulation Sheet

1 601-920 O-ring (Combustion Tube)

1 605-814 Pedestal Adapter Assembly

1 605-816 Pedestal Silicon Nitride

1 605-979 Electrical Retainer Connector

1 608-898 Receptacle Cover

1 615-426 AC Power Cord

1 621-867 Crucible Bucket Top Cover

1 621-875 Manual Crucible Bucket

1 621-876 Crucible Bucket Fan and Shroud Assembly

1 621-883 Crucible Mounting Bracket Assembly

2 762-458 Connector Nut

1 765-978 Receptacle (30A 125/250V)

1 772-381 Lance Cleaner

2 772-905 Combustion Tube

1 774-828 Connector

1 774-829 Plug Hood

1 783-747 Dust Cup Removal Assembly

1 789-149 EMI Gasket Ring

Page 29: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–29

619-020-070 Component Pack

4 190-278 Screw

2 190-742 Screw

6 193-055 Flat Washer

1 550-080 Insulation Sheet

1 601-920 O-ring (Combustion Tube)

1 605-814 Pedestal Adapter Assembly

1 605-816 Pedestal Silicon Nitride

1 605-979 Electrical Retainer Connector

1 608-898 Receptacle Cover

1 615-426 AC Power Cord

1 616-555 9 Pin Cable Assembly

1 621-867 Crucible Bucket Top Cover

1 621-875 Manual Crucible Bucket

1 621-876 Crucible Bucket Fan and Shroud Assembly

1 621-883 Crucible Mounting Bracket Assembly

2 762-458 Connector Nut

1 765-978 Receptacle (30A 125/250V)

1 772-381 Lance Cleaner

2 772-905 Combustion Tube

1 774-828 Connector

1 774-829 Plug Hood

1 783-747 Dust Cup Removal Assembly

1 789-149 EMI Gasket Ring

Page 30: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–30 CS230 Introduction

619-030-070 Component Pack

1 190-009 Thumb Screw

4 190-278 Screw

2 190-279 Screw

2 190-624 Screw

2 190-742 Screw

8 193-055 Washer

1 550-080 Insulation

1 601-920 O-ring (Combustion Tube)

1 605-814 Pedestal Adapter Assembly

1 605-816 Silicon Nitride Pedestal

1 605-979 Electrical Retainer Connector

1 608-898 Receptacle Cover

1 615-426 AC Power Cord

1 616-555 Cable Assembly

1 618-723 Dust Box Assembly

1 621-867 Crucible Bucket Top Cover

1 621-875 Manual Crucible Bucket

1 621-876 Crucible Bucket Fan and Shroud Assembly

1 621-883 Crucible Mounting Bracket Assembly

2 762-458 Connector Nut

1 765-978 Receptacle (30A 125/250V)

1 772-381 Lance Cleaner

2 772-905 Combustion Tube

1 774-828 Connector

1 774-829 Hood Plug

1 782-603 Vacuum Cleaner Hose

1 782-604 Hose Vacuum Coupling

1 782-880 Vacuum Filter

1 783-747 Dust Cup Removal Assembly

1 789-149 EMI Gasket Ring

1 789-230 Vacuum Assembly

Page 31: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–31

619-040-070 Component Pack

1 190-009 Thumb Screw

4 190-278 Screw

2 190-279 Screw

2 190-624 Screw

2 190-742 Screw

8 193-055 Washer

1 550-080 Insulation

1 601-920 O-ring (Combustion Tube)

1 605-814 Pedestal Adapter Assembly

1 605-816 Silicon Nitride Pedestal

1 605-979 Electrical Retainer Connector

1 608-898 Receptacle Cover

1 615-426 AC Power Cord

1 616-555 Cable Assembly

1 618-723 Dust Box Assembly

1 621-867 Crucible Bucket Top Cover

1 621-875 Manual Crucible Bucket

1 621-876 Crucible Bucket Fan and Shroud Assembly

1 621-883 Crucible Mounting Bracket Assembly

2 762-458 Connector Nut

1 765-978 Receptacle (30A 125/250V)

1 772-381 Cleaner Lance

2 772-905 Combustion Tube

1 774-828 Connector

1 774-829 Plug Hood

1 782-603 Vacuum Cleaner Hose

1 782-604 Hose Vacuum Coupling

1 782-880 Vacuum Filter

1 783-747 Dust Cup Removal Assembly

1 789-149 EMI Gasket Ring

1 789-230 Vacuum Assembly

Page 32: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–32 CS230 Introduction

686-421 PC Tower Package

1 609-787 Component Pack including:

1 611-119 Receptacle

1 618-980 Mouse Pad

1 686-330 Computer Tower

1 686-442 Nameplate Id

Page 33: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–33

Options

CF-10 CF-10 Gas Purification System

501-291 Oxygen Pressure Regulator

601-480-110 Dot Matrix Printer Kit (parallel)

605-980 Keyboard (for PC)

614-459 Deskjet Printer Cartridge (Black)

614-460 Deskjet Printer Cartridge (Color)

619-995 Bar Code Reader

620-630-110 Deskjet Printer Kit (for Windows® packages)

621-890 Autocleaner/Pinch Valve Kit

621-891 Vacuum Cleaner Kit

621-892 Pinch Valve Upgrade Kit (included with autocleaner kit)

621-893 Dust Removal Upgrade Kit

621-894 Autocleaner Upgrade Kit

621-895 Windows Upgrade Kit

621-896 PC Tower Upgrade with Monitor Kit

621-897 Autocleaner Upgrade Kit with Dust Removal

621-984 Quick Loader Kit

621-985 Quick Feeder/Loader Kit

621-986 Autocleaner/Quick Loader Kit

621-987 Autocleaner/Quick Feeder/Loader Kit

751-000-120 Balance L-050 3 Place Kit

751-300-160 Balance L-250 4 Place Kit

751-700-120 Balance 5 Place PC Controlled Kit

766-036 Compressed Air Regulator

782-345 Vacuum Cleaner Filter

Page 34: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–34 CS230 Introduction

Specifications

Range (at 1 gram)

CS230C

Carbon ........................................... 4 ppm to 3.5%

Sulfur............................................. 4 ppm to 0.4%

CS230CLC

Carbon ........................................... 2 ppm to 0.5%

Sulfur............................................. 4 ppm to 0.4%

CS230CHC

Carbon ........................................... 60 ppm to 6.0%

Sulfur............................................. 4 ppm to 0.4%

CS230SHC

Carbon ........................................... 4 ppm to 3.5%

Sulfur............................................. 60 ppm to 1.75%

CS230CSHC

Carbon ........................................... 60 ppm to 6.0%

Sulfur............................................. 60 ppm to 1.75%

• Reducing sample weight may extend range.

Result Readability (Display Capability)

With PC—Carbon and Sulfur............... 15 digits of precision

Without PC—Carbon and Sulfur .......... 0.1 ppm

Calibration

With PC .......................................... Multi-Point, Linear

Without PC...................................... Single Point, Linear

Analysis Time..................................... 45 seconds (Nominal)

Sample Size ....................................... 1 gram (Nominal)

Detection Method ............................... Solid State, Infrared Absorption, Carbon as Carbon Dioxide Sulfur as Sulfur Dioxide

Note

Page 35: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–35

Precision

CS230C

Carbon ........................................... 2 ppm or 0.5% RSD*

Sulfur............................................. 2 ppm or 1.5% RSD*

CS230CLC

Carbon ........................................... 1 ppm or 0.5% RSD*

Sulfur............................................. 2 ppm or 1.5% RSD*

CS230CHC

Carbon ........................................... 30 ppm or 0.5% RSD*

Sulfur............................................. 2 ppm or 1.5% RSD*

CS230SHC

Carbon ........................................... 2 ppm or 0.5% RSD*

Sulfur............................................. 30 ppm or 1.5% RSD*

CS230CSHC

Carbon ........................................... 30 ppm or 0.5% RSD*

Sulfur............................................. 30 ppm or 1.5% RSD*

Chemical Reagents............................. Anhydrone Magnesium Perchlorate, Sodium Hydroxide on an inert base, Lecosorb, Platinized Silica, Cellulose

Gas Required

Carrier Gas ..................................... Oxygen 99.5% pure, 40 psi (2.76 bars)

Pneumatic Gas................................. Compressed Air, Nitrogen, or Argon, 40 psi (2.76 bars), source must be oil and water free.

Gas Flow (based on nominal analysis time)

Measure ......................................... 3 liters per analysis

Pneumatic ...................................... 1 liters per analysis

Regulators

Oxygen........................................... 501-291 Oxygen Pressure Regulator

Compressed Air ............................... 766-036 Compressed Air Regulator

Inert Gas ........................................ 764-216 Inert Gas Regulator

Furnace.............................................. Induction, 18 MHz, 2.2 kW

Data Transmit .................................... RS-232 (included)

* One Sigma, conformance tested by gas dose analysis.

Page 36: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–36 CS230 Introduction

Data Storage

With PC .......................................... Limited only by hard drive space

Without PC...................................... 10 Sample Weights, 50 Answers, 5 Methods

Keypad

With PC .......................................... External

Without PC...................................... Internal Membrane/External Optional

Display

With PC .......................................... 15.00 inch SVGA Monitor

Without PC...................................... Liquid Crystal (16 x 26 characters)

External PC

Computer ....................................... PentiumTM 166 MHz (min), 1.2 GB Hard Drive (min)

Monitor........................................... 15.00 inch SVGA (min)

Operating System ............................ Microsoft™ Windows® 95 (min)

Printer

With PC .......................................... Deskjet

Without PC...................................... Dot Matrix

Dimensions

Determinator

Height ............................................ 30.50 inches (77.5 cm)

Width ............................................. 27.50 inches (70.0 cm)

Depth............................................. 23.50 inches (59.7 cm)

Weight ........................................... 300 pounds

Computer (PC based system)

Height ............................................ 17.00 inches (43.2 cm)

Width ............................................. 8.00 inches (20.3 cm)

Depth............................................. 17.00 inches (43.2 cm)

Weight ........................................... 29 pounds

Monitor (PC based system)

Height ............................................ 15.00 inches (38.1 cm)

Width ............................................. 14.00 inches (35.6 cm)

Depth............................................. 16.00 inches (40.6 cm)

Weight ........................................... 35 pounds

Shipping Weight (without PC) .............. 420 pounds

Page 37: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Introduction CS230 1–37

Electrical Power Requirements

Determinator................................... 230 V~, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, Single phase, 15 amps max

Operating Current ....................... 12 Amps

Stand-by Current ........................ 4 Amps

Computer (PC based) ....................... 115/230 V~, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 5/3 amps

Monitor (PC based)........................... 90 to 264 V~, 50/60 Hz, 1.6 amps max

Balance .......................................... 120 V~, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 amps max

• Allow a 6 inch minimum access area around all units.

Note

Page 38: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

1–38 CS230 Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 39: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–1

2 2 Installation

Illustrations .......................................................................2–2 Instrument Installation........................................................2–3 Facility Requirements..........................................................2–6 International Installation .....................................................2–7

Instrument Voltage Selection ........................................ 2–10 Oscillator Tube Installation............................................ 2–12 Anhydrone Tube Packing .............................................. 2–14

Removal................................................................ 2–14 Packing ................................................................. 2–14

Incoming Reagent Tube Packing .................................... 2–16 Removal................................................................ 2–16 Packing ................................................................. 2–16

Combustion Tube Installation ........................................ 2–18 Without Autocleaner................................................ 2–18 With Autocleaner .................................................... 2–18

Gas Connections.......................................................... 2–21 Crucible Bucket Installation........................................... 2–22 Computer Installation................................................... 2–25 Pedestal Installation..................................................... 2–26

Without Autocleaner................................................ 2–26 With Autocleaner .................................................... 2–27

Installation

Page 40: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–2 CS230 Installation

Illustrations

Figure 2-1 ......... Wiring Diagrams........................................ 2–8 Figure 2-2 ......... Interconnection Diagram ............................ 2–9 Figure 2-3 ......... Voltage Selection Terminal Strip .................. 2–11 Figure 2-4 ......... RF Shield Removal ..................................... 2–13 Figure 2-5 ......... Oscillator Chassis....................................... 2–13 Figure 2-6 ......... Anhydrone Tube ........................................ 2–15 Figure 2-7 ......... Reagent Tube Removal............................... 2–17 Figure 2-8 ......... Reagent Tube Packing ................................ 2–17 Figure 2-9 ......... Combustion Tube Installation— Without Autocleaner.................................. 2–19 Figure 2-10 ....... Combustion Tube Installation— With Autocleaner....................................... 2–20 Figure 2-11 ....... Crucible Mounting Bracket........................... 2–22 Figure 2-12 ....... Shroud and Fan Assembly........................... 2–23 Figure 2-13 ....... Crucible Bucket Installation ......................... 2–24 Figure 2-14 ....... Pedestal Installation—Without Autocleaner .... 2–26 Figure 2-15 ....... Pedestal Installation—With Autocleaner......... 2–27

Page 41: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–3

Instrument Installation

• The following procedure should be used for first time installation of the instrument. This procedure assumes that the instrument has been unpacked and positioned in its permanent location.

• The Balance and Printer are not supplied with the instrument. They must be purchased separately. Refer to Options, page 1–33, for more information.

• This procedure should be used for both the Windows® and DSP instruments.

1. Provide a work surface with convenient electrical power and gas supplies. Refer to Facility Requirements, page 2–6, for power and gas supply requirements.

2. Install the Instrument as shown in Figure 2-2, page 2–9. Provide a minimum space of six inches around the instrument for airflow.

POSSIBLE SHOCK HAZARD To avoid electrical shock, make sure the AC line cord is disconnected from facility power before performing this procedure.

3. Connect the AC power cord, supplied with the instrument, to the power connections on the rear of the instrument. DO NOT plug it into facility power. For installation outside the U.S.A. Refer to International Installation on page 2–7.

4. Determine the facility line voltage and set the instrument operating voltage. Refer to Instrument Voltage Selection on page 2–10.

5. Install the Oscillator tube in the furnace. Refer to Oscillator Tube Installation, page 2–12.

6. Remove the Anhydrone tube from the gas panel of the instrument and pack it. Refer to Anhydrone Tube Packing, page 2–14.

Notes

WARNING

Page 42: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–4 CS230 Installation

7. Remove the Incoming Reagent tube from the gas panel of the instrument and pack it. Refer to page 2–16, Incoming Reagent Tube Packing.

POSSIBLE OPERATOR INJURY Oxygen is not recommended for use in the pneumatic systems of LECO instruments. If a spark is present an explosion may result.

8. Connect the Gas connections from the gas supplies to the oxygen and pneumatic gas connectors on the rear of the instrument. Refer to Gas Connections, page 2–21.

9. Install the Combustion Tube into the furnace. Refer to Combustion Tube Installation, page 2–18.

10. Install the Crucible Bucket to the right side of the determinator. Refer to Crucible Bucket Installation, page 2–22.

• The next step should only be performed if the instrument was purchased with a computer.

11. If a Computer was purchased with the instrument install the computer. Refer to Computer Installation, page 2–25.

12. Install the Pedestal onto the lower seal assembly. Refer to Pedestal Installation, page 2–26.

POSSIBLE OPERATOR INJURY The measure and purge flow exhaust ports must be exhausted away from the work area and should not be vented into the lab. Connect the exhaust ports to the lab exhaust system or a fume hood.

13. Connect the Measure and Purge Exhaust ports, on the rear of the instrument, to the facility exhaust. Refer to Figure 2-2, page 2–9.

Windows®

CAUTION

!

CAUTION

!

Page 43: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–5

14. If a Balance was purchased with the instrument install the balance. Refer to Balance Installation, page 3–3.

15. If a Dot Matrix Printer was purchased with the instrument install the printer. Refer to Dot Matrix Printer, page 3–7.

16. Plug the instrument into facility AC power DO NOT turn the instrument on until instructed to do so.

17. This completes instrument installation. Before continuing with operation, refer to System Setup on page 4–1.

Page 44: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–6 CS230 Installation

Facility Requirements

Electrical Power Requirements

Determinator................................... 230 V~, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, Single phase, 15 amps max

Operating Current ....................... 12 Amps

Stand-by Current ........................ 4 Amps

Balance .......................................... 120 V~, ±10%, 60 Hz, 0.5 amps max

Gas Required

Carrier Gas ..................................... Oxygen 99.5% pure, 40 psi (2.76 bars)

Pneumatic Gas................................. Compressed Air, Nitrogen, or Argon, 40 psi (2.76 bars), source must be oil and water free.

Regulators

Oxygen........................................... 501-291 Oxygen Pressure Regulator

Compressed Air ............................... 766-036 Compressed Air Regulator

Page 45: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–7

International Installation

For international installation, a HAR approved line cord for use in the end country must be obtained. This product requires a disconnect device that may either be the plug of the power cord or a disconnect device installed at the installation site if the equipment is permanently wired.

When the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device, the socket/outlet must be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. When the wiring is permanently connected, a disconnect device (such as a circuit breaker or switch) must be lockable, installed near the equipment, and be easily accessible.

Page 46: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–8 CS230 Installation

Figure 2-1 Wiring Diagrams

POWER

POWER

POWER

POWER

POWER

NEUTRAL

GROUND

GROUND

GROUND

115 V~

115 V~

115 V~

115 V~

220 V~

230 V~

230 V~

0 V~

0 V~

CHASSIS(CABINET)GROUND

CHASSIS(CABINET)GROUND

CHASSIS(CABINET)GROUND

GREEN/YELLOW

GREEN/YELLOW

GREEN/YELLOW

GREEN/YELLOW

GREEN/YELLOW

LIGHT BLUE

LIGHT BLUE

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BROWN

POWER CORD

LIGHT BLUE

220 V 3 WIRE WIRING DIAGRAM — INTERNATIONAL~

Y Y

YY

T

T

G

G

G

G

G

G

X

X

X

X

X

X

B B

BB

B

B

BLACK

BLACKPLUG

PLUG

RECEPTACLE

RECEPTACLE

LIGHTBLUE

*

LIGHTBLUE

*

* BLUE WIRE IS CUT OFF INSIDE THE UNIT AND IS NON-FUNCTIONAL

* BLUE WIRE IS CUT OFF INSIDE THE UNIT AND IS NON-FUNCTIONAL

230 V 3 WIRE WIRING DIAGRAM — U.S.A.~

230 V 4 WIRE CENTER TAPPED WIRING DIAGRAM — U.S.A.~

NEUTRAL

Page 47: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–9

PRINTER BALANCE

AC POWER AC POWER

BAL.

DATAXMIT

PRINTER

ALARM

OXYGEN(35 PSI)

PURGEEXHAUST

MEASUREEXHAUST

PNEU. INLET40 PSI

KEYBOARD 5 A CIRCUITBREAKER

VACUUMCLEANER

AUX POWERBREAKER

O35 PSI

2

PNEU40 PSI

BALANCE

PRINTER

MEASURE FLOWEXHAUST

AC POWER

VACUUMCONNECTOR

230V - 50/60Hz5.0 AMPS

~

VACUUMCIRCUIT BREAKER

EXTERNALKEYBOARD

PURGEEXHAUST

ALARM

OXYGENINLET

DATAINTERFACE

PNEUMATICINLET

CONNECTORASSEMBLY(2-REQ'D)

AUX POWERBREAKER

115

BAL.

DATAXMIT

PRINTER

ALARM

OXYGEN(35 PSI)

PURGEEXHAUST

MEASUREEXHAUST

PNEU. INLET40 PSI

KEYBOARD 5 A CIRCUITBREAKER

VACUUMCLEANER

AUX POWERBREAKER

DATAINTERFACE

BALANCE

SERIALPORT A

CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF INSTRUMENT WITH INTERNAL DISPLAY AND KEYPAD (DSP)

CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF WINDOWS INSTRUMENT (PC CONTROL)

NOTES: THE DESKJET PRINTER OPTION CONNECTS TO THE PC.THE DOT MATRIX PRINTER CONNECTS TO THE INSTRUMENT(FOR SINGLE LINE PRINTING). DATA TRANSMIT CONNECTS TOTHE PC (SECOND RS-232 SERIAL PORT). GAS CONNECTIONSARE THE SAME AS ABOVE.

BALANCE

AC POWER

DISPLAY

WINDOWS

AUTOMATIONINTERFACE

AUTOMATIONINTERFACE

Figure 2-2

Interconnection Diagram

Page 48: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–10 CS230 Installation

Instrument Voltage Selection

• The determinator is setup at the factory to operate from 230 V~. If the AC line voltage is different, perform the procedure below.

POSSIBLE SHOCK HAZARD To avoid electrical shock, make sure the AC line cord is disconnected from facility power before performing this procedure.

1. Remove the cover panel from the oscillator power supply, located on the right side of the unit.

• The gray wires referred to in step 2 are only shown as gray in Figure 2-3, page 2–11. The wires may be blue or white in the determinator. Make sure when changing the voltage taps the correct wires are moved. If the correct wires to move cannot be determined, contact the LECO service department for help.

2. Locate the voltage selection terminal strip and move the gray voltage selection wires, and varistor terminal connected to the gray wire, to the tap that most closely matches the actual line voltage. Refer to Figure 2-3, page 2–11.

3. Tighten the terminal strip screws and reinstall the cover panel.

Note

Note

Page 49: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–11

Figure 2-3 Voltage Selection Terminal Strip

240

TERM 1OFK3

220 200 COM

Page 50: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–12 CS230 Installation

Oscillator Tube Installation

1. Remove the RF shield side panel of the oscillator chassis, located on the right side of the furnace. Refer to Figure 2-4and Figure 2-5 on page 2–13.

2. Install the oscillator tube.

3. Secure the plate connector to the top of the oscillator tube.

4. Install the RF choke.

5. Install the vacuum capacitor.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD The capacitors on the oscillator chassis store a lethal amount of energy and must be discharged to avoid electric shock . Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the oscillator chassis.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD After the power has been turned on, both the oscillator and the furnace power supply produce lethal voltages. Contact the LECO service department for more information. Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the power supply.

6. Replace the RF shield side panel and tighten all screws.

7. Replace the right side panel.

WARNING

WARNING

Page 51: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–13

Figure 2-4 RF Shield Removal

Figure 2-5

Oscillator Chassis

Page 52: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–14 CS230 Installation

Anhydrone Tube Packing

Removal

1. Slide the anhydrone tube upward until the bottom end can swing free.

2. Tilt out the free anhydrone tube end.

3. Pull the anhydrone tube downward off the top port.

4. To reinstall the anhydrone tube, push the top end of the anhydrone tube over the top port, tilt it inward and pull it down, pushing it over the bottom port.

Packing

1. Insert a screen filter into the bottom of the anhydrone reagent tube. Refer to Figure 2-6, page 2–15. Position the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up onto the anhydrone tube 1/4 inch.

2. Pack 2 inches of quartz wool into the bottom of the anhydrone tube.

3. Pour 2 inches of anhydrone onto the quartz wool and gently tap it down. Add anhydrone as necessary to maintain a level of 2 inches.

4. Pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool on top of the anhydrone leaving a 1 inch opening at the top of the anhydrone tube.

5. Insert the reagent stop into the top of the anhydrone tube. Push is firmly on top of the quartz wool to hold the packing material in place.

6. Reinstall the packed anhydrone tube into the lower left reagent tube port blocks on the front panel.

Page 53: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–15

Figure 2-6 Anhydrone Tube

502-1771/2" QUARTZ WOOL

501-1712" ANHYDRONE

601-390QUICK

DISCONNECTTUBE

502-1772" QUARTZ WOOL

775-306SCREEN FILTER

789-095REAGENT STOP

765-976O-RING

(2 REQ'D)

Page 54: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–16 CS230 Installation

Incoming Reagent Tube Packing

Removal

1. Slide each reagent tube upward until the bottom end can swing free. Refer to Figure 2-7, page 2–17.

2. Tilt out the free reagent tube end.

3. Pull the reagent tube downward off the top port.

4. To reinstall the reagent tube, push the top end of the reagent tube over the top port, tilt it inward and pull it down, pushing it over the bottom port.

Packing

1. Insert a screen filter into the bottom of each reagent tube. Position the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up into the reagent tube 1/4 inch. Refer to Figure 2-8, page 2–17.

2. Pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool into the bottom of the reagent tube.

3. Pour 1 inch of anhydrone onto the quartz wool and gently tap it down. Add anhydrone as necessary to maintain a level of 1 inch.

4. Pour Lecosorb onto the anhydrone until all but the top 1/2 inch of the reagent tube is filled, gently tapping it down.

5. Firmly pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool on top of the Lecosorb filling the bubble in the reagent tube.

6. Reinstall the packed reagent tube into the lower left reagent tube port blocks on the front panel.

Page 55: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–17

Figure 2-7 Reagent Tube Removal

Figure 2-8 Reagent Tube Packing

771-373REAGENT

TUBE

502-177/ " QUARTZ WOOL12

502-1742" LECOSORB

771-373QUICK DISCONNECT

TUBE

501-1711" ANHYDRONE

502-177/ " QUARTZ WOOL12

775-306SCREEN FILTER

Page 56: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–18 CS230 Installation

Combustion Tube Installation

Without Autocleaner

1. Lift the lance access door.

2. Insert the combustion tube o-ring into the cleaning head adapter ring. Refer to Figure 2-9 page 2–19.

3. Install the combustion tube into the furnace, fitting it into the combustion tube ring.

4. Install the o-ring around the bottom of the combustion tube.

5. Install the EMI gasket into the seal on the bottom of the combustion tube.

6. Insert the cleaning head into the cleaning head adapter ring and turn the cleaning head to lock it in place.

7. Connect the measure flow and lance flow tubing to the cleaning head. Refer to Autocleaner Assembly, Figure 2-9, page 2–19, for flow tubing locations.

With Autocleaner

1. Lift the lance access door.

2. Insert the combustion tube o-ring into the autocleaner assembly. Refer to Figure 2-10, page 2–20.

3. Install the combustion tube into the furnace, fitting it into the combustion tube ring. Refer to Figure 2-9, page 2–19.

4. Install the o-ring around the bottom of the combustion tube.

5. Install the EMI gasket into the seal on the bottom of the combustion tube.

6. Insert the autocleaner assembly into the furnace. Tighten thumbscrews. Refer to Figure 2-10, page 2–20.

7. Connect the measure flow and lance flow tubing to the autocleaner assembly. Refer to Figure 2-10, page 2–20.

Page 57: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–19

Figure 2-9 Combustion Tube Installation—Without Autocleaner

781-420CLEANING

HEAD

772-905COMBUSTION

TUBE

772-906COMBUSTION

TUBE RING

781-401CLEANING HEADADAPTER RING

601-920O-RING

789-149EMI GASKET

(GASKET TO GOAROUND OUTER

DIAMETER OF O-RING)

605-816PEDESTAL

LANCE FLOWCONNECTION

MEASURE FLOWCONNECTION

762-058O-RING

(SHOW UPSIDE DOWNTO VIEW O-RING)

Page 58: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–20 CS230 Installation

601-920O-RING

789-149EMI GASKET

(GASKET TO GOAROUND OUTER

DIAMETER OF O-RING)

605-816PEDESTAL

(SHOWN UPSIDE DOWNTO VIEW O-RINGS)

773-320O-RING

(2 REQ'D)

604-172O-RING

604-291AIR CYLINDER

LANCE FLOWCONNECTION

772-905COMBUSTION

TUBE

762-058O-RING

773-926PLATE

190-090THUMBSCREWS

(2 REQ'D)

609-626AUTOCLEANER

ASSEMBLY

604-272CAP

MEASURE FLOWCONNECTION

604-268BODY ASSEMBLY

Figure 2-10

Combustion Tube Installation—With Autocleaner

Page 59: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–21

Gas Connections

• Refer to Figure 2-2 on page 2–9 for more information

1. Remove the cap plugs from the fittings on the back panel.

2. Fasten the connector attached to the oxygen supply line to the regulator on the oxygen supply.

3. Attach the connector on the other end of the supply line to the OXY INLET connector on the rear panel of the unit.

POSSIBLE MACHINE DAMAGE Oxygen is not recommended for use in the pneumatic systems of LECO instruments.

4. Fasten the connector attached to the pneumatic supply line to the regulator on the pneumatic supply.

5. Attach the other end of the connector to the PNEU INLET connector on the rear panel or the unit.

Note

!

Page 60: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–22 CS230 Installation

Crucible Bucket Installation

1. Remove the right side panel of the determinator and locate the white 2-pin fan connector labeled J60. Refer to Figure 2-11 below.

2. Position the connector around the notch in the side panel and reinstall the side panel. Use caution not to pinch the wires with the side panel.

3. Install the Crucible Mounting Bracket to the side of the determinator using 2 screws and 2 flat washers. Both screws and flat washers attach to the base of the determinator.

Figure 2-11

Crucible Mounting Bracket

Page 61: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–23

4. Mount the Shroud and Fan assembly to the crucible bracket using 4 screws and 4 flat washers. Refer to Figure 2-12 below.

5. Fish the wires and connector from the fan assembly through the hole in the crucible bracket and plug the fan electrical connector into J60. Push the wires out of the way.

Figure 2-12 Shroud and Fan Assembly

Page 62: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–24 CS230 Installation

6. Insert the Crucible Bucket into the shroud assembly and install the Top Cover. Refer to Figure 2-13 below.

Figure 2-13 Crucible Bucket Installation

Page 63: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–25

Computer Installation

• This procedure should only be used if the instrument was purchased with a computer.

1. Install the Computer System. Refer to the manual supplied with the computer.

2. Connect one end of the Computer Interface Cable to the data transmit connector on the instrument. Refer to Figure 2-2, page 2–9.

3. Connect the other end of the Computer Interface Cable to the serial interface connector COM 1 on the computer.

4. Connect the Video Cable from the monitor to the monitor connector on the rear of the computer.

5. Connect the cables from the keyboard and mouse to the computer.

6. If an optional Ink Jet Printer was purchased with the instrument connect the printer cable to the printer port on the rear of the computer. If may be necessary to install the printer software on the computer. Wait until the complete system is installed and then follow the instructions supplied with the printer to install it.

7. Connect the AC power cables from the computer, monitor, balance and printer to facility AC power. DO NOT turn the computer on until instructed to do so.

Windows®

Page 64: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–26 CS230 Installation

Pedestal Installation

Without Autocleaner

1. Install the pedestal adapter onto the lower seal assembly, see Figure 2-14 below). The pedestal adapter should only be hand-tightened.

2. Set the pedestal onto the pedestal adapter. The crucible will rest on the pedestal.

Figure 2-14 Pedestal Installation—Without Autocleaner

605-816PEDESTAL

605-814PEDESTALADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

783-675LOWER SEAL

ASSEMBLY

Page 65: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Installation CS230 2–27

With Autocleaner

1. Install the pedestal adapter onto the lower seal assembly, see Figure 2-15 below). The pedestal adapter should only be hand-tightened.

2. Set the pedestal onto the pedestal adapter. The crucible will rest on the pedestal.

Figure 2-15 Pedestal Installation—With Autocleaner

605-816PEDESTAL

605-814PEDESTALADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

789-430LOWER SEAL

ASSEMBLY

781-412BARB FITTING

760-215ELBOW

Page 66: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

2–28 CS230 Installation

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 67: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–1

3 3 Option Installation

Illustrations .......................................................................3–2 Balance Installation ............................................................3–3

Balance Interfacing........................................................3–4 Resetting the Balance ....................................................3–5 Setting the Data Output Parameter ..................................3–5

Dot Matrix Printer (601-480-110) .........................................3–7 Printer Settings ........................................................... 3–10

Deskjet (Inkjet) Printer (611-499-110)................................ 3–11 Installation of Optional Kits for the Autocleaner .................... 3–12

Autocleaner ................................................................ 3–12 Dust Removal Kit......................................................... 3–12 Vacuum Cleaner Kit ..................................................... 3–12

Quick Loader and Quick Feeder Operation ............................ 3–13

Option Installation

Page 68: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–2 CS230 Option Installation

Illustrations

Figure 3-1 ......... Balance Control Panel................................. 3–6 Figure 3-2 ......... Balance Assembly ...................................... 3–6 Figure 3-3 ......... Ribbon Cartridge Installation ....................... 3–9 Figure 3-4 ......... Paper Installation....................................... 3–9 Figure 3-5 ......... Crucible Positions....................................... 3–14

Page 69: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–3

Balance Installation

Refer to the Balance Options on page 4–23 or the Balance Tab on 4–61, to set the balance option parameters and configure the determinator to recognize the balance. If the balance and determinator are not programmed with the same configuration parameter values, no weights may be transferred.

The determinator will default to the correct parameter values to operate with the balance. If the balance does not operate properly with the determinator, verify the balance options parameter values set from the determinator. The correct parameter values are shown on pages 4–23 and 4–61.

• To insure proper balance operation, balance interfacing, resetting the balance and setting the data output parameter procedures, beginning on the next page, must be performed.

• The following information is for the LECO four-place balance. If another balance is used, follow the instructions provided with the balance.

Notes

Page 70: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–4 CS230 Option Installation

Balance Interfacing

1. Unpack the balance and assemble it as shown in the balance operation manual.

2. Plug the AC adapter, supplied with the balance, into facility power. Connect the AC adapter cable to the power input jack on the rear of the balance. Refer to Figure 2-2, page 2–9.

3. Adjust the balance feet to level the balance. The level bubble should be inside the circle when the balance is level. The level bubble is located on the rear of the balance.

4. Locate the balance connector on the rear panel of the determinator and connect one end of the balance interface cable to the balance connector. Connect the other end of the cable to the rear of the balance. Refer to Figure 2-2, page 2–9.

5. To properly interface the balance with the determinator, perform the Resetting the Balance procedure, page 3–5, to reset the balance to the factory defaults.

6. After the balance is reset, do not change any of the configuration codes except the one shown in this manual. The balance codes can be changed to custom configure the balance, if desired, after this procedure is completed.

Page 71: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–5

Resetting the Balance

1. Remove the hole plug on the lower front right corner of the balance and move the menu access switch to the right. Refer to Figure 3-2, page 3–6.

2. Turn the AC power on to the balance by pushing the power on button, Figure 3-1, page 3–6. As soon as all the segments on the display light up, push the Tare button. The display will be blank for a few seconds and then display the menu code settings.

3. Press F1 to display 9 in the left digit.

4. Press Print to skip the center digit.

5. Press F1 to display 1 as the right digit.

6. Press Tare.

7. Press CF.

8. Turn the AC power off to the balance.

Setting the Data Output Parameter

1. Set the data output parameter to "Auto print regardless of stability" code 614 using this procedure.

2. Turn the AC power on to the balance by pushing the power on button. As soon as all segments on the display light up, push the Tare button. The display will be blank for a few seconds and then display the menu code settings.

3. Press F1 to display 6 in the left digit.

4. Press Print to display the center digit.

5. Press F1 to display 1 as the center digit.

6. Press Print to display the right digit.

7. Press F1 to display 4 as the right digit.

8. Press Tare.

9. Press CF.

10. Reposition the menu access switch to the left and reinstall the hole plug.

Page 72: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–6 CS230 Option Installation

Figure 3-1 Balance Control Panel

Figure 3-2 Balance Assembly

MENU ACCESSSWITCH

TARE TARE

CF

I/O F1

F2

i

POWER ON

CLEARFUNCTION

PRINT

INFORMATION

TARE

TOGGLE

Page 73: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–7

Dot Matrix Printer (601-480-110)

• Refer to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 on page 3–9 when following these procedures.

• The optional Dot Matrix Printer is used with the DSP and Windows® instruments. DSP all printing and Windows® line printing.

1. Unpack the printer. Locate the separate printer manual in the printer box and check the contents of the box against the manual list.

2. Remove any tape, bags, or styrofoam from the printer. Remove the platen knob from the styrofoam before discarding.

3. Remove the shipping retainer located inside the printer (save it in case the printer needs to be shipped).

4. Install the platen knob by inserting the shaft into the hole in the right side of the printer. Match the flat side of the knob to the flat side of the platen shaft.

• After extended periods of printing, allow time for the printhead to cool before touching it.

• Turn off the power before moving the printhead.

5. Install the ribbon cartridge.

A. Open the access cover.

B. Position the printhead between bail rollers and push the bail lever back.

C. Place the flat end of the ribbon cartridge, knob facing up, into the ribbon plate, then lower the other end over the printhead and snap it into place.

D. Turn the knob clockwise to take up ribbon slack.

E. The headgap lever can be adjusted for one or two part forms (position 1), three or four part forms (position 2), or envelopes, and extra-thick paper (position 3).

6. Install the paper separator.

A. Lift the rear cover.

Notes

Notes

Page 74: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–8 CS230 Option Installation

B. Hold the legs against the separator and place the separator tabs over the studs on the sides of the rear cover.

C. Close the rear cover.

7. Set the printer next to the determinator and the paper tray behind the printer.

8. Attach the printer power cord to the printer. Connect the other end to the facility power source.

9. The printer should be off.

10. Connect the printer interface cable to the printer and the back of the determinator.

11. Install the paper.

A. Move the paper lever and bail lever forward.

B. Open the access and rear covers and feed the paper under the rear cover.

C. Open the tractor covers and align the track feed holes on the paper with the tractor pins. Close the tractors.

D. Turn the platen knob to feed the paper around the platen. Be sure the paper feeds underneath the black tabs in front of the tractors.

E. To adjust the tractors:

1) Lift the lock levers on both sides.

2) Slide the tractors into position. Reference marks on the printer show the recommended left edge position for the two most common paper sizes.

• Do not place the left edge of the paper more than 1/2 inch from the end of the platen or the printer will signal a paper out alarm.

12. Close the rear cover and lay the paper separator flat.

13. Open the guide wire to stop paper from curling back into the printer.

14. Close the access cover.

15. Paper can be fed from the bottom if the printer is placed on a stand. Refer to the printer manual for details.

16. The control panel of the printer is used to configure the printer and its corresponding features. Refer to the operation section of the printer manual. The Printer Settings can be found on page 3–10.

Note

Page 75: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–9

Figure 3-3 Ribbon Cartridge Installation

Figure 3-4 Paper Installation

RIBBONCARTRIDGE

TAKE-UPKNOB

RIBBONPLATE RIBBON SHIELD

DO NOT REMOVE

ACCESS COVER

PAPER LEVER

PLATEN KNOB

PINS

ON/OFFSWITCH

TRACK FEEDHOLES

REAR COVER

PAPER

GUIDE WIRE

PAPER SEPARATOR

LOCK LEVER

TRACTOR COVER

SEPARATOR TAB

STUD

BAIL LEVER

Page 76: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–10 CS230 Option Installation

Printer Settings Group Item Settings Font Print Mode Utility Pitch 10 CPI Style Normal Size Single General Control Emulation Mode Epson FXe Graphics Bi-directional Paper Out Override No Print Registration O Operator Panel Functions Full Operation Reset Inhibit No Print Suppress Effective Yes CPU Compensation Standard Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Form Tear-Off Off Skip-Over Perforation No Auto LF No Auto CR No Auto Feed XT Invalid Page Length 11 inches Symbol Sets Character Set Set I Language Set American Zero Character Slashed Serial I/F Option Parity None Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 8 Protocol Ready/Busy Diagnostic Test No Busy Line SSD- Baud Rate 9600 BPS DSR Signal Valid DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Busy Time 200 Milliseconds

• To restore the menu to its original factory settings, turn the printer off, hold down the Sel and Mode buttons, then turn the printer on again.

Note

Page 77: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–11

Deskjet (Inkjet) Printer (611-499-110)

• The optional Deskjet Printer is only used with the Windows® controlled instrument. It connects directly to the PC. Refer to the Figure 2-2 on page 2–9.

• To install the Deskjet Printer refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the printer.

Notes

Page 78: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–12 CS230 Option Installation

Installation of Optional Kits for the Autocleaner

Autocleaner

• For part number and ordering information, refer to Options on page 1–33.

• Follow instructions provided in the kit for current installation instructions.

In order for the autoloader to function properly the dust removal kit must also be installed.

Dust Removal Kit

• For part number and ordering information, refer to Options on page 1–33.

• Follow instructions provided in the kit for current installation instructions.

• The instructions are applicable for the dust removal kit as well as the autocleaner/dust removal kit.

Vacuum Cleaner Kit

• For part number and ordering information, refer to Options on page 1–33.

• Follow instructions provided in the kit for current installation instructions

Notes

CAUTION

!

Notes

Notes

Page 79: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–13

Quick Loader and Quick Feeder Operation

• For Quick Loader and Quick Feeder installation refer to the kit instructions provided with the Quick Loader and Quick Feeder. See Options on page 1–33.

• A total of 23 samples can be automatically analyzed with the Quick Loader and Quick Feeder at one time.

• Refer to the Setup and Operation sections of this manual for sample loading and general operation.

1. Set the following system parameters to configure the determinator for use with the Quick Loader and Quick Feeder.

A. Click the Configuration menu and select System.

B. Click the down arrow in the autocleaner selection box and select enable.

Notes

Page 80: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–14 CS230 Option Installation

C. Click the down arrow in the door option selection box and select enable.

D. Check the Enable Quick Loader check box.

E. Check the Enable Clean Before Load check box if desired. This selection cleans the combustion area before the dust quick loader is cycled preventing dust from falling into the next sample.

2. Click Rotate, in the toolbar, to lock the carousel into position.

3. Click Enable, in the tool bar, to enable the quick loader.

4. Click the Sample menu and select Queued Samples (this can also be selected from the tool bar). Select the number of samples and the sample positions on the pedestals. Example: If all three pedestals have crucibles on them select number 3 (1-1-1). Refer to the illustration below.

Figure 3-5

Crucible Positions

• The crucible numbers in the illustration refer to the crucible pedestal positions in the software. 1-1-1 is crucibles 1-2-3 in that order.

• A “1” indicates a crucible is present and “0” indicates a crucible is not on the pedestal.

5. Weigh the crucibles, tare out the weight of the crucibles and weight the sample.

6. Position the crucibles on the carousel and pedestals.

Notes

Page 81: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Option Installation CS230 3–15

7. Enter the sample weights in the sample grid. The sample order in the grid must match the sample order on the pedestals and carousel.

8. Press the Load Sample button the front of the determinator to load the first sample and start analysis.

Page 82: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

3–16 CS230 Option Installation

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 83: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–1

4 4 System Setup

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed on page 4–38.

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 4–6.

Keypad Setup Contents:

Illustrations .......................................................................4–4 Controls and Indicators .......................................................4–6 Menu Organization Chart .....................................................4–8 Power-Up ........................................................................ 4–10

About the Examples ..................................................... 4–10 Menus........................................................................ 4–10 Keypad ...................................................................... 4–11

Using the Keypad ................................................... 4–12 Notices and Errors ....................................................... 4–13 Confirmation............................................................... 4–14 Copyright Screen......................................................... 4–14

System Overview ............................................................. 4–15 Main Menu Overview.................................................... 4–15

System Check.................................................................. 4–16 Ambient Monitor.......................................................... 4–16

System Setup .................................................................. 4–18 System Options........................................................... 4–19

System Setup

Windows®

Keypad

Keypad

Page 84: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–2 CS230 System Setup

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults.............................. 4–20 Transmit Options......................................................... 4–21

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults.............................. 4–22 Balance Options .......................................................... 4–23

Definitions and Selections ........................................ 4–25 System Clock.............................................................. 4–26 Set Barometer ............................................................ 4–27 Combustion Pressure ................................................... 4–28 Quick Access Menu ...................................................... 4–29

Operation .............................................................. 4–29 Defining ................................................................ 4–30

Change Password ........................................................ 4–31 Analysis Method Menu....................................................... 4–32

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults................................... 4–34 Data Transmit.................................................................. 4–35

Data Transmit Format .................................................. 4–37 System Setup for Windows® .............................................. 4–38 Illustrations ..................................................................... 4–41 Controls and Indicators ..................................................... 4–42 Automatically Transmit Analysis Results............................... 4–44 Configure Maintenance Counters......................................... 4–46

Maintenance Counter Definitions.................................... 4–47 Configure the Analysis Report ............................................ 4–48

Select the Fields ..................................................... 4–49 Select the Font....................................................... 4–49 Configure the Plot................................................... 4–49 Line Printing .......................................................... 4–49

Configure the Screen ........................................................ 4–50 Tool Bar ..................................................................... 4–50 Status Bar .................................................................. 4–50

Configure the Spreadsheet................................................. 4–51 Configure Element Definitions........................................ 4–52

Method Development ........................................................ 4–53 Method Parameter Definitions........................................ 4–55

Sample Templates ............................................................ 4–56 Create a Sample Template............................................ 4–56

Windows®

Page 85: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–3

Standards ....................................................................... 4–57 Standards Definitions ................................................... 4–58

System Configuration........................................................ 4–59 System Configuration Definitions ................................... 4–60

System Tab ........................................................... 4–60 Balance Tab........................................................... 4–61 Balance Definitions ................................................. 4–62

Set Barometric Pressure .................................................... 4–63 Transmission Formats ....................................................... 4–64

Define Fields............................................................... 4–64 Define Delimiters......................................................... 4–66 Communication Settings............................................... 4–68

Preview Transmitted Data.................................................. 4–71 Select Language............................................................... 4–73 Users.............................................................................. 4–74

Add User .................................................................... 4–74 Assign User Functions .................................................. 4–75

Sample Filters.................................................................. 4–77 Apply a Filter and Sort Sample Data............................... 4–77 Define a Filter to Apply................................................. 4–78 Automatically Reapply the Sample Filter ......................... 4–79

User Defined Fields........................................................... 4–81 Functions ................................................................... 4–83 Number Formatting ..................................................... 4–85

Page 86: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–4 CS230 System Setup

Illustrations

Figure 4-1 ......... Controls and Indicators with Autocleaner....... 4–7 Figure 4-2 ......... Keypad .................................................... 4–11 Figure 4-3 ......... Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob......... 4–28 Figure 4-4 ......... Controls and Indicators............................... 4–43

Page 87: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–5

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 88: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–6 CS230 System Setup

Controls and Indicators

• Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4–7, for locations of the items listed below.

Determinator Power On/Off Switch—Switches power on and off to the determinator. Also acts as a circuit breaker on the incoming facility line power.

Measure Flow Rotameter—Indicates the oxygen flow rate in lpm (liters per minute). Nominal indication is 3.0 lpm.

Keypad—The keypad is used as a communications link between the operator and the determinator. Operation of the determinator is controlled from the keypad.

Display Screen—The display screen provides a visual link between the operator and determinator.

Brightness—The brightness control, on top of unit, adjusts the brightness of the display screen. This control should be adjusted by the operator for the amount of brightness desired.

Contrast—The contrast control, on top of unit, adjusts the contrast of the display screen. This control should be adjusted by the operator for the best display contrast and is usually adjusted after the brightness control has been properly set.

Printer (not shown)—The printer is used to print out analysis data, information presented on the display, and buffer or screen plots.

Furnace Power On/Off Switch—Switches power on and off to the furnace. Also acts as a circuit breaker on the incoming facility line power.

Power Lever Adjustment—Controls oscillator maximum power output by adjusting the plate current for approximately 100 mA (idling current) to 500 mA (full power). The overload protection is reset by turning the adjustment fully counterclockwise until it clicks and then turning it clockwise.

Vacuum Cleaner On/Off Switch—Turns the optional vacuum cleaner on or off. The vacuum cleaner can be used to clear dust and debris from the combustion area and furnace shelf.

Piston Up/Down Switch—This switch controls the movement of the piston, either up or down. During operation, the piston raises the crucible and sample into the furnace for analysis. This switch is also used to control the piston during furnace cleaning.

Note

Page 89: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–7

BRIGHTNESSCONTROL

CONTRASTCONTROL

AUTOCLEANERACCESS DOOR

INCOMINGREAGENT

TUBE

DISPLAYSCREEN

KEYPAD

CATALYST HEATERASSEMBLY

ANHYDRONETUBE

MEASUREFLOW ROTAMETER

ANALYZERAC POWER

SWITCH

CELLULOSEFILTER

POWER LEVELADJUSTMENT

FURNACEAC POWER

SWITCH

VACUUMCLEANER

ON/OFF SWITCH

PISTONUP/DOWNSWITCH

CRUCIBLEBUCKET

Figure 4-1 Controls and Indicators with Autocleaner

Page 90: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–8 CS230 System Setup

Menu Organization Chart

[1] Analyze [1] Delete Weights

[2] Insert Weight

[3] Print Weights

[4] System Controls [1] Print

[5] Clean Switch

[6] Balance Weight

[7] Transmit Last

[2] Results [1] Record Format

[2] List Format

[3] Clear Selections

[4] Delete

[5] Statistics [1] Print

[6] Print

[7] Transmit

[3] Calibration [1] Record Format

[2] List Format

[3] Clear Selections

[4] Calculate Calib [1] Print

[2] Reset Calib

[5] Edit Calibration [1] Print

[6] Calculate Blank [1] Print

[7] Edit Blank [1] Print

[8] Recalculate [1] Re-Calc. Todays

[2] Re-Calc. Select

Page 91: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–9

[4] Set-Up [1] Analysis Method [1] Print

[2] Select Method [1] 1-Method

[2] 2-Method

[3] 3-Method

[4] 4-Method

[5] 5-Method

[3] Copy Method To

[2] System Options [1] Print

[3] Transmit Options [1] Print

[4] Balance Option [1] Print

[2] Test Balance

[3] Test Tare

[5] System Clock

[6] Set Barometer [1] Print

[9] More [1] Quick Option Menu

[2] Linearization

[3] Change Password

[5] Diagnostics [1] Ambient Monitor [1] Display Units

[2] Display Volts

[3] Print

[2] Switches

[3] Valves

[4] Leak Check [1] Entire System

[2] Bypass Furnace

[5] Print Buffer

[6] Plot Buffer [1] Print

[7] System Print

[8] Reset Memory

Page 92: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–10 CS230 System Setup

Power-Up

1. The power switches for both the determinator and furnace should be set to the off positions.

2. Connect the determinator to a proper electrical power source.

3. Turn on the gas supplies and set the oxygen pressure to 40 psi and the pneumatic pressure to 40 psi.

4. Turn the determinator and furnace power switches on.

5. After a short delay, the main menu should appear on the display screen.

6. Turn the gas ON. Refer to the System Controls procedure, page 5–16.

7. Allow the determinator to warm-up for one hour before performing a system check or sample analysis.

About the Examples

The numbers used for the screen examples in this manual are only to illustrate operation and may or may not be applicable to specific procedures.

Menus

When pressing the menu key, a menu will appear displaying different choices. When a menu appears, only options within the menu are selectable. To remove a menu from the display screen, press exit.

Page 93: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–11

Keypad

The keypad used on the determinator is a matrix of switches, referred to as keys, which must be pressed to activate a selection, see Figure 4-2 , below. This type of keypad is referred to as a 'membrane keypad'. When activating a selection, press the middle of the key until the microcomputer and display screen recognize the selection.

Figure 4-2

Keypad

PREVIOUS

NEXT

SELECT

MENU

RESET

START

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 YES NO

DEL EXIT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQR

STU VWX YZ

+ ,. % # -

Page 94: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–12 CS230 System Setup

Using the Keypad

Next—Moves the cursor to the next sample. When the analyze screen is displayed, it is used to select a sample from the sample weight list. When the calibrate and results screens are displayed, it is used to select sample results. It is also used to move the cursor to the next line when editing.

Previous—Moves the cursor to the previous sample. A beep will sound when the cursor cannot be advanced further. When the analyze screen is displayed, previous is used to select a sample from the sample weight list. When the calibrate and results screens are displayed, it is used to select sample results and also used for editing.

Select—Moves the cursor to the next selection within a menu or screen. Permits the operator to scroll through selections and select sample results. Acts as an enter key to advance to the next line.

Menu—Displays a menu of selections available for the current screen.

Reset—Stops an analysis in progress. The operator is permitted to abort, reset, or continue.

Start—In the manual mode, after a weight has been entered and the furnace closed, press start to begin analysis of a sample. In the automatic mode, closing the furnace causes analysis to begin.

DEL—Used to delete a character at the cursor's position. When no more characters are left to delete, a beep will sound.

Exit—Used to remove a menu or screen and return to the previous menu or screen.

Left/Right Arrow Keys—Used to move the cursor one position to the left or right. Refer to the Number/Letter Keys definition below.

Yes/No—Used to select a result. These keys are used to include (yes) or exclude (no) a sample. They are also used to enable or disable a menu option, respond to a confirmation screen, and permit the user to scroll through selections.

1STU, 2VWX, 3YZ, 4JKL, 5MNO, 6PQR, 7ABC, 8DEF, 9GHI, 0Symbol—These keys are used to enter data during operation or editing, select a procedure, or select a menu option. By repeatedly pressing the key, the operator is permitted selection of the number or letter shown on the key. Use the left/right arrow keys to move the cursor and continue entering or editing data.

Page 95: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–13

Notices and Errors

A notice or error is a message that appears on the display screen that warns the operator of a condition that could yield an incorrect result. Notices or errors may be caused by operator error or component failure. Operator problems are most likely to occur after a manual procedure or a change in the setup, method, or system control parameters. If a notice or error occurs, refer to page 10–22 for corrective action.

Page 96: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–14 CS230 System Setup

Confirmation

Any operation that can cause information to be deleted will display a confirmation box. Press yes to confirm the operation or no to abort the delete command.

Copyright Screen

Upon power-up and exit from the main menu, the copyright screen will be displayed. When this screen is displayed, wait a few seconds, the screen will disappear and the main menu will appear in its place.

Page 97: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–15

System Overview

Main Menu Overview

Headline—After power-up, the main menu appears and displays the headline. The headline contains the model number of the determinator, the software version installed, and the type of determinator. It is important to note the version of software when contacting the LECO Corporation.

Center Window—During operation, display screens and menus will appear in the center window. When the determinator is powered up, the main menu appears providing the operator with five selections, [1] Analyze, [2] Results, [3] Calibrate, [4] Setup, and [5] Diagnostics. The number in brackets refers to the key number to press on the keypad. When making a selection from the main menu, a screen or menu will always appear. For more information concerning the main menu selections, refer to the Setup and Operation chapters.

Bottom Line—The information on this line will appear under a menu or screen. During analysis, the bottom line will display the weight list. During setup and system configuration, this line will display the range and/or selections available. When the main menu is displayed, this line is blank.

LECO CS230 V 2.xx Carbon/Sulfur Determinator

[1] Analyze [2] Results [3] Calibrate [4] Setup [5] Diagnostics

Page 98: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–16 CS230 System Setup

System Check

• All steps in the installation and initial power-up sections must be completed before performing these procedures.

• The gas supplies must be on, the oxygen regulator set to 40 psi and the pneumatic regulator set to 40 psi.

• The determinator AC power must be on.

Ambient Monitor

• The ambient monitor is used to display system parameters during operation or servicing of the determinator.

• If the determinator has just been turned on, wait one hour before checking the ambient monitor for the system to stabilize.

1. The ambient monitor is accessed from the diagnostics menu. From the main menu, press [5] Diagnostics.

2. Press [1] Ambient Monitor to display the ambient monitor.

• The ambient monitor will continuously update as the operator views it.

Notes

Notes

Note

Ambient Monitor

Carbon IR Cell 8.500 v Sulfur IR Cell 8.500 v Oven Temp 48oC Catalyst Heater 350oC System Pressure 762 mm Plate Current 480 mA Grid Current 100 mA

Page 99: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–17

3. Check that all system parameters, temperatures and voltages fall within the range limits shown below. If any values are out of range refer to the setup, operation or service sections for correction procedures.

Parameters Nominal Value Range Units

Carbon IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

Sulfur IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

Oven Temp 48 46 to 50 oC

Catalyst Heater 350 325 to 357 oC

System Pressure 762 740 to 790 mmHg

Plate Current 460* 420 to 500 mA

Grid Current 100* 80 to 120 mA

* Nominal values during analysis only. When furnace power is off, the plate and grid current should be zero.

4. Press Select to toggle the displayed parameters between voltages and units.

5. Press Menu to display the ambient monitor menu.

6. Press [1] Display Units to display the system parameters in voltages, temperatures and pressure.

7. Press [2] Display Voltages to display the a/d output voltages.

8. Press [3] Print to create a hardcopy printout of the ambient monitor parameters.

9. Press Exit to remove the ambient monitor menu and display the ambient monitor screen.

Ambient Monitor

[1] Display Units [2] Display Voltages [3] Print

Page 100: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–18 CS230 System Setup

System Setup

• The following procedures are all located under the system setup menu. To access this menu, press [4] Setup from the main menu.

• Analysis method is described in the Operation and Diagnostics chapters.

Notes

Setup

[1] Analysis Method [2] System Options [3] Transmit Options [4] Balance Options [5] System Clock [6] Set Barometer [9] More…

Page 101: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–19

System Options

• This procedure allows the operator to set the system operating conditions used for analysis.

1. Access the system options screen by choosing [2] System Options from the setup menu.

2. Press Select to scroll through the system option parameters. Refer to Definitions, Ranges and Defaults on page 4–20.

3. Enter the value from the keypad or press the right or left arrow keys to move the cursor into position to change a value.

4. Press Menu to display the system option menu.

5. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the system option parameters on the system printer.

6. Press Exit to exit the system option menu and return to the system option screen.

Note

System Options

Gas Conservation (min) 15 Gas Conservation Mode Con Catalyst Heater (DegC) 350 Enable Auto Cleaner No Enable Door Option No Result Format Short Blank Lines 1 Date Format MM-DD-YY Pressure Control Yes

System Options

[1] Print

Page 102: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–20 CS230 System Setup

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults

Gas Conservation (Min)—The time in minutes, after analysis, when the determinator automatically switches to the gas conservation mode. Range: 0 to 600 minutes, Default: 15 minutes

Gas Conservation Mode—The oxygen flow settings used as gas conservation. Normal oxygen flow is 3 liters per minute. Conservation mode changes the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute. Off turns the oxygen flow completely off. Settings: Off or Con. Default: Con

Catalyst Heater Temperature—The set operating temperature of the catalyst heater. Range 0 to 900oC, Default 350oC

Enable Auto Cleaner—Selects operation of the optional autocleaner. Select yes if the autocleaner is installed, or no if the autocleaner is not installed. Default: No

Enable Door Option—Selects operation of the optional combustion system cleaning door. Select yes if the cleaning door is installed, or no if the cleaning door is not installed. Refer to Dust Removal Kit on page 3–12. Default: No

Results Format—Selects the desired answer format. Short format prints time, date, sample weight, and result. Long format prints time, date, sample weight, result, calibration, blank, time, and peak. Table format prints the long format parameters in tabular form. Default: Long

# Blank Lines—The number of blank lines between analysis results printed on the system printer. Range: 0 to 2 lines. Default: 0

Date Format—Selects the date format displayed on the display screen and printer on the system printer. Selections: MM-DD-YY (Month-Day-Year), or DD-MM-YY (Day-Month-Year). Default: MM-DD-YY

Pressure Control—This parameter is set by the operator and determined by the hardware installed in the determinator. If the determinator has the electronic barometric pressure control installed, select yes. If the determinator does not have the electronic barometric pressure control installed, select no.

Page 103: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–21

Transmit Options

• This procedure configures the determinator for communications with a data transmit peripheral.

1. Access transmit options by choosing [3] Transmit Options from the setup menu.

2. Press Select to move the cursor to the next line. Refer to Definitions, Ranges and Defaults on page 4–22.

3. Press No to scroll through the transmit options parameters.

4. Press Yes to affirm the selection and move the cursor down one line.

5. Press Menu to display the transmit options menu.

6. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the transmit option parameters on the system printer.

7. Press Exit to remove the transmit options menu.

Note

Transmit Options

Enable Yes Field Separator Comma Record Separator CRLF Head/Tail SOH/EOT Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Option: Yes Yes/No

Transmit Options

[1] Print

Page 104: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–22 CS230 System Setup

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults

Enable—Enables or disables data transmit operation. Select yes to enable data transmit, or no to disable data transmit. Default: No

Field Separator—Selects the data character used to separate fields of data. Selections: Comma, Space, or FS (field separator). Default: Comma

Record Separator—Selects the data character(s) used to separate records of data. Selections: CRLF (carriage return and line feed), CR (carriage return), LF (line feed), or RS (record separator). Default: CRLF

Head/Tail—Determines the data character(s) used to start and end the frame of data sent during data transmit. Selections: None, SOH/EOH, or CTRL Z. Refer to the Data Transmit section on page 4–35. Default: SOH/EOH

None—No starting or ending data character.

SOH/EOH—Starting data character is 01 (hex), start of header, and the ending data character is 04 (hex), end of header.

CTRL Z—No starting data character. Ending data character is 01A (hex).

Baud Rate—Sets the data transmission speed in bits per second. Selections: 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps. Default: 9600

Parity—Sets the method of error checking used. Selections: Even, Odd, or None. Default: Even

Data Bits—Used to select the number of bits per byte for data that will be transmitted. Selections: 5 to 8. Default: 8

Stop Bits—Used to select the number of bits that are used to signal the end of a transmitted data byte. Selections: 1 or 2. Default: 1

Page 105: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–23

Balance Options

• This procedure configures the determinator for use with an external balance.

• The balance options parameters must match the configuration of the balance. Refer to page 3–5, Setting the Data Output Parameter.

1. Access balance options by choosing [4] Balance Options from the setup menu.

2. Press Select to move the cursor to the next line. Refer to Definitions and Selections on page 4–25.

3. Pressing No scrolls through the accepted balance options parameters (except for readability). Enter the desired number for the readability parameter.)

4. Press Yes to move the cursor down one line.

5. Press Menu to display the balance options menu.

Notes

Balance Options

Readability 4 Weight Entry Auto Tare Tare Command Esc T Baud Rate 1200 Parity Odd Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Option: Yes Yes/No

Balance Option

[1] Print [2] Test Balance [3] Test Tare

Page 106: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–24 CS230 System Setup

6. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the balance option parameters on the system printer.

7. Press [2] Test Balance to determine if the interfaced balance will communicate with the determinator. The test balance screen will be displayed.

8. The weight displayed on the balance should be displayed on the test balance screen. If the display is not correct, recheck the balance options parameters and balance programming.

9. Press any key to return to the balance options.

10. Press [3] Test Tare to determine if the determinator can tare the interfaced balance. The weight displayed on the balance should indicate zero. If the display is not correct, recheck the balance options parameters and balance programming.

11. Press Exit to escape the balance option menu and return to the setup menu.

Test Balance

Any Key to Continue

Weight String From Balance

0.000g

Page 107: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–25

Definitions and Selections

Readability—The number of significant places to the right of the decimal point transferred from the balance to the determinator during sample weight entry. Range: 3 to 5. Default: 4.

Weight Entry—Selections are Remote (weight is entered from the balance), Normal (weight is entered from the determinator), Auto Tare (automatic tare for weights over 15 g, weight is entered from the determinator), or None (manual weight entry only). Refer to Sample Weight Entry, page 5–23. Default: None

Tare Command—The command from the determinator that the balance reads to Tare. Selections are 'T', 'ESC T', or 'T, CR, LF'. For LECO supplied balances, set the command to 'T, CR, LF'.

Baud Rate—Sets the data transmission speed in bits per second. Selections: 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps. For LECO supplied balances, set baud rate to 1200 bps.

Parity—Sets the method of error checking used. Selections: Even, Odd, or None. For LECO supplied balances, set parity to Odd.

Data Bits—Used to select the number of bits per byte for data that will be transmitted. Selections: 5 to 8. For LECO supplied balances, set data bits to 7.

Stop Bits—Used to select the number of bits that are used to signal the end of a transmitted data byte. Selections: 1 or 2. For LECO supplied balances, set stop bits to 1.

Page 108: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–26 CS230 System Setup

System Clock

• The system clock procedure permits the operator to set the determinator's internal real-time clock.

• The feasibility of the entered time and date are checked before the operator is allowed to exit this procedure.

1. Access the system clock procedure by choosing [5] System Clock from the setup menu. The enter time prompt will appear on the screen.

2. Press the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor into position to set the time or press Select to set the date. The enter date prompt will appear below the time.

3. If the time was set in step 2, press Select to move the cursor into position to set the date. The enter date prompt will appear below the time.

4. After setting the time and/or date, press Exit to return to the main menu.

Notes

System Clock

Enter Time HH:MM:SS 10:24:39 Enter Date MM-DD-YY 01-01-00

Page 109: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–27

Set Barometer

• The local barometric pressure must be known before the barometric pressure can be set.

1. Access the set barometric pressure procedure by choosing [6] Set Barometer from the setup menu.

2. In a short period of time the screen will change and the

barometric pressure value will be highlighted.

3. Press the right or left arrow keys to move the cursor into position and change the barometric pressure to the correct value with the number keys.

4. Press Menu to display the barometric pressure menu.

5. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the edited barometric pressure on the system printer.

6. Press Exit to return to the setup menu.

Note

Set Barometer

Pressure is Stabilizing 740 mm Hg

Set Barometer

Pressure (mm/Hg) 743

Page 110: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–28 CS230 System Setup

Combustion Pressure

• The Set Barometer procedure, page 4–27, should be completed before the combustion pressure is set.

1. Remove the left side panel of the determinator.

2. From the Main menu, press [1] Analyze then Menu to display the analysis menu.

3. Press [4] System Controls. Set carrier gas to on.

4. Adjust the pressure regulator for 12 psi as shown on the pressure gauge, see Figure 4-3, below.

5. After this procedure is completed, replace the left side panel.

ADJUSTMENTKNOB

PRESSUREREGULATOR

Figure 4-3

Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob

Note

Page 111: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–29

Quick Access Menu

The quick access menu is a list of user-defined selections that can be programmed by the operator. By defining and using the quick access menu, the instrument will be both faster and easier to use.

Operation

1. From the main menu, press Menu. The quick access menu will be displayed.

2. Press the number on the keypad to the left of the desired selection. The determinator will immediately display the menu selection.

3. To return to the main menu, press Exit.

Quick Menu

[1] Analyze [2] Results [3] Calibrate [4] Analysis Method [5] Set Barometer [6] Leak Check [7] Print Buffer [8] Plot Buffer [9] Ambient Monitor

Page 112: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–30 CS230 System Setup

Defining

• When a system password is being used, the operator must enter the password to exit the quick access menu and return to the main menu.

1. Access the quick access menu options procedure by pressing [9] More then [1] Quick Menu Option from the setup menu. The quick menu options screen will be displayed.

2. Press Select to move the highlight and select the item to change.

3. At the highlight, press no to change the item and select the desired item function. Selections: Analyze, Results, Calibrate, Analysis Method, Set Barometer, Leak Check, Print Buffer, Plot Buffer, and Ambient Monitor.

4. Press Menu to display the quick menu options menu.

5. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the quick menu options Items on the system printer.

6. Press Exit to remove the quick menu options menu and return to the setup menu.

Note

Quick Menu Options

Item 1 Analyze Item 2 Results Item 3 Calibrate Item 4 Analysis Method Item 5 Set Barometer Item 6 Leak Check Item 7 Print Buffer Item 8 Plot Buffer Item 9 Ambient Monitor Option: Yes Yes/No

Quick Menu Options

[1] Print

Page 113: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–31

Change Password

• Change password protects selections under the setup menu from being accessed by unauthorized operators.

• To clear an entered password and permit use of the determinator without securing the setup menu, press Select twice from the enter password screen.

1. Access change password by pressing [9] More then [3] Change Password from the setup menu.

2. From the user dialog screen, enter a six-digit password and press Select. The verify password screen will be displayed.

3. From the verify password screen, enter the same password as entered in step 2.

4. Press Select to accept the password and return to the setup menu.

5. Press Exit to return to the main menu. In order to return to the setup menu, the password entered in step 2 must be entered when the enter password screen appears.

Notes

Change Password

USER DIALOG

Verify Password [ ]

Change Password

USER DIALOG

Enter Password [ ]

Page 114: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–32 CS230 System Setup

Analysis Method Menu

• Analysis method permits the operator to set the analysis parameters used in the analysis of a sample.

• Up to five analysis methods can be defined from the analysis method menu and stored.

• Each analysis method can be calibrated separately. Refer to the Calibration menu.

1. To access the analysis method screen, choose [4] Setup from the main menu. From the setup menu, choose [1] Analysis Method. The analysis method screen will appear.

2. Press Select to scroll through and select the parameters to edit. Refer to the Definitions, Ranges and Defaults on page 4–34.

3. If the parameter to be edited is a number, enter the value from the keyboard, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit and enter the value with the keypad.

4. If a parameter to be edited is selectable text, press No to scroll through the selections or Yes to accept the selection and move to the next parameter.

Notes

Analysis Method

Method Name 1-Method Secure Method No Purge Time 15 Delay Time 0 Significant Figures 4 Minimum Time Out 4.0 Comparator Level 1.0 Calibration 1.000 Blank 0.000

Page 115: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–33

5. Press Menu to display the analysis method menu.

6. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the analysis method parameters.

7. Press [2] Select Method to display the analysis method selection menu and select the analysis method to edit.

8. Press [3] Copy Method To to copy the current method to a selected method.

9. Press Exit to remove the analysis method selection menu and return to the analysis method screen.

Analysis Method

[1] Print [2] Select Method [3] Copy Method To

Select Method

[1] 1-Method [2] 2-Method [3] 3-Method [4] 4-Method [5] 5-Method

Page 116: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–34 CS230 System Setup

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults

Analysis Method—Permits the operator to assign a specific name to an analysis method. Up to eight characters can be entered.

Secure Method—When set to yes, the operator is prompted to type in the password before the method can be changed. If set to no, the current method is used and no prompt will appear. Selections: Yes or No. Default: No.

Purge Time—The amount of time the determinator permits carrier gas flows through the combustion system before analysis, clearing it of atmosphere that may have entered when the furnace was open during crucible loading. Range: 0 to 60 seconds. Default: 1 second.

Delay Time—The amount of time permitted to elapse after purge time and before analysis. This time period helps establish a stable baseline reference for detection. Range: 0 to 60 seconds. Default: 0 seconds.

Significant Figures—The number of digits displayed in the element result. This includes digits to the left and right of the decimal point. Range: 0 to 5. Default: 5.

Minimum Time-Out—The minimum time permitted for analysis. Range: 10 to 225 seconds. Default: 40 seconds.

Comparator Level—An area of the analysis plot, less than peak height, measured as a percentage of peak height that will stop analysis. Refer to Comparator Level, page 7–8. Range: 0 to 100 percent. Default: 1.0% carbon.

Calibration—The linear multiplier value used to adjust the detector output of a standard to its known value. This value is automatically determined during calibration. Refer to Calibrate Menu, page 5–27. Range: 0.0100 to 10.0000. Default: 1.0000.

Blank—The percentage of element (based on a 1 gram nominal sample size) measured by the system that is not caused by combustion of the analyte. Crucible contamination and the accelerator primarily cause this value. This value is automatically subtracted from the result by the determinator. Refer to Calculate Blank, page 5–33. Range: - 1.00000 to +1.00000. Default: 0.00000.

Answer Format—Automatically converts the element result to the selected answer format. Selections for Carbon: % carbon, % C[CO2] and % CaCO3. Default: % carbon. Selections for Sulfur: % sulfur, % S[SO3] and S[SO4]. Default: % sulfur.

Page 117: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–35

Data Transmit

• The transmit data output is RS-232.

• All character generation is coded in ASCII format.

• Special characters (such as expanded print characters) are filtered out.

1. Place the on/off power switch to the off position.

2. Connect the data transmit serial port, on the rear panel of the determinator, to the serial connector on the peripheral device using the supplied cable. Refer to Figure 2-2, page 2–9.

3. Configure the determinator's output to match the peripheral device. Refer to Transmit Options, page 4–21, for the configuration procedure.

4. To transmit the results, stored in the results database, refer to Transmit Selected Results, page 5–46.

5. Switch the power on.

Notes

Page 118: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–36 CS230 System Setup

ASCII Character Definition Table

ACK Acknowledge EM End of Medium NAK Negative acknowledge BEL Bell, or alarm ENQ Enquiry NUL Null, or all zeros BS Backspace EOT End of transmission RS Record separator CAN Cancel ESC Escape SI Shift in CR Carriage return ETB End of transmission block SO Shift Out DC1 Device control 1 ETX End of text SOH Start of heading DC2 Device control 2 FF Form feed SP Space DC3 Device control 3 FS File separator STX Start of text DC4 Device control 4 GS Group separator SUB Substitute DEL Delete HT Horizontal tab SYN Synchronous idle DLE Data link escape LF Line feed US Unit separator VT Vertical Tab *American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) X3.4 - 1967 for use on tape © 1967 USA Standards Institute. Reprinted by permission.

Page 119: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–37

Data Transmit Format

Line 1: SOH Sample ID Code FS Weight FS

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13

SOH " A 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 " FS 1 . 0 0 0 0 0 FS

01 22 41 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 22 1C 31 2E 30 30 30 30 30 1C

Method FS Carbon Results FS

14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

" 1 - M E T H O D " FS 1 . 0 0 7 6 FS

22 31 2D 4D 45 54 48 4F 44 22 1C 31 2E 30 30 37 36 20 20 1C

Carbon Calib. FS Carbon Blank FS Time FS

28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A

1 . 0 0 0 0 FS 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 FS 0 4 0 FS

31 2E 30 30 30 30 1C 30 2E 30 30 30 30 30 1C 30 34 30 1C

Peak FS Sulfur Result FS Sulfur Calib. FS

3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50

1 5 3 7 FS 1 . 0 0 7 6 FS 1 . 0 0 0 0 FS

20 31 35 33 37 1C 31 2E 30 30 37 36 20 20 1C 31 2E 30 30 30 30 1C

Sulfur Blank FS Time FS Peak FS

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 FS 0 4 0 FS 1 5 3 7 FS

30 2E 30 30 30 30 30 1C 30 34 30 1C 20 31 35 33 37 1C

Time and Date RS EOT

63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72

1 0 : 2 3 0 1 - 2 8 - 9 9 RS EOT

31 30 3A 32 33 20 30 31 2D 32 38 2D 39 39 1E 04

Page 120: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–38 CS230 System Setup

System Setup for Windows®

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 4–1.

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed on page 4–38.

Keypad Setup Contents:

Illustrations .......................................................................4–4 Controls and Indicators .......................................................4–6 Menu Organization Chart .....................................................4–8 Power-Up ........................................................................ 4–10

About the Examples ..................................................... 4–10 Menus........................................................................ 4–10 Keypad ...................................................................... 4–11

Using the Keypad ................................................... 4–12 Notices and Errors ....................................................... 4–13 Confirmation............................................................... 4–14 Copyright Screen......................................................... 4–14

System Overview ............................................................. 4–15 Main Menu Overview.................................................... 4–15

System Check.................................................................. 4–16 Ambient Monitor.......................................................... 4–16

System Setup .................................................................. 4–18 System Options........................................................... 4–19

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults.............................. 4–20 Transmit Options......................................................... 4–21

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults.............................. 4–22

Keypad

Windows®

Keypad

Page 121: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–39

Balance Options .......................................................... 4–23 Definitions and Selections ........................................ 4–25

System Clock.............................................................. 4–26 Set Barometer ............................................................ 4–27 Combustion Pressure ................................................... 4–28 Quick Access Menu ...................................................... 4–29

Operation .............................................................. 4–29 Defining ................................................................ 4–30

Change Password ........................................................ 4–31 Analysis Method Menu....................................................... 4–32

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults................................... 4–34 Data Transmit.................................................................. 4–35

Data Transmit Format .................................................. 4–37 System Setup for Windows® .............................................. 4–38 Illustrations ..................................................................... 4–41 Controls and Indicators ..................................................... 4–42 Automatically Transmit Analysis Results............................... 4–44 Configure Maintenance Counters......................................... 4–46

Maintenance Counter Definitions.................................... 4–47 Configure the Analysis Report ............................................ 4–48

Select the Fields ..................................................... 4–49 Select the Font....................................................... 4–49 Configure the Plot................................................... 4–49 Line Printing .......................................................... 4–49

Configure the Screen ........................................................ 4–50 Tool Bar ..................................................................... 4–50 Status Bar .................................................................. 4–50

Configure the Spreadsheet................................................. 4–51 Configure Element Definitions........................................ 4–52

Method Development ........................................................ 4–53 Method Parameter Definitions........................................ 4–55

Sample Templates ............................................................ 4–56 Create a Sample Template............................................ 4–56

Standards ....................................................................... 4–57 Standards Definitions ................................................... 4–58

System Configuration........................................................ 4–59

Page 122: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–40 CS230 System Setup

System Configuration Definitions ................................... 4–60 System Tab ........................................................... 4–60 Balance Tab........................................................... 4–61 Balance Definitions ................................................. 4–62

Set Barometric Pressure .................................................... 4–63 Transmission Formats ....................................................... 4–64

Define Fields............................................................... 4–64 Define Delimiters......................................................... 4–66 Communication Settings............................................... 4–68

Preview Transmitted Data.................................................. 4–71 Select Language............................................................... 4–73 Users.............................................................................. 4–74

Add User .................................................................... 4–74 Assign User Functions .................................................. 4–75

Sample Filters.................................................................. 4–77 Apply a Filter and Sort Sample Data............................... 4–77 Define a Filter to Apply................................................. 4–78 Automatically Reapply the Sample Filter ......................... 4–79

User Defined Fields........................................................... 4–81 Functions ................................................................... 4–83 Number Formatting ..................................................... 4–85

Page 123: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–41

Illustrations

Figure 4-1 ......... Controls and Indicators with Autocleaner....... 4–7 Figure 4-2 ......... Keypad .................................................... 4–11 Figure 4-3 ......... Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob......... 4–28 Figure 4-4 ......... Controls and Indicators............................... 4–43

Page 124: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–42 CS230 System Setup

Controls and Indicators

• Refer to Figure 4-4, on page 4–43, for locations of the items listed below.

Determinator Power On/Off Switch—Switches power on and off to the determinator. Also acts as a circuit breaker on the incoming facility line power.

Measure Flow Rotameter—Indicates the oxygen flow rate in lpm (liters per minute). Nominal indication is 3.0 lpm.

Computer (not shown)—Used to control the instrument and process sample data.

Printer (not shown)—The printer is used to print out analysis data, information presented on the display, and buffer or screen plots.

Furnace Power On/Off Switch—Switches power on and off to the furnace. Also acts as a circuit breaker on the incoming facility line power.

Power Lever Adjustment—Controls oscillator maximum power output by adjusting the plate current for approximately 100 mA (idling current) to 500 mA (full power). The overload protection is reset by turning the adjustment fully counterclockwise until it clicks and then turning it clockwise.

Vacuum Cleaner On/Off Switch—Turns the optional vacuum cleaner on or off. The vacuum cleaner can be used to clear dust and debris from the combustion area and furnace shelf.

Piston Up/Down Switch—This switch controls the movement of the piston, either up or down. During operation, the piston raises the crucible and sample into the furnace for analysis. This switch is also used to control the piston during furnace cleaning.

Note

Page 125: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–43

BRIGHTNESSCONTROL

CONTRASTCONTROL

AUTOCLEANERACCESS DOOR

INCOMINGREAGENT

TUBE

CATALYST HEATERASSEMBLY

ANHYDRONETUBE

MEASUREFLOW ROTAMETER

ANALYZERAC POWER

SWITCH

CELLULOSEFILTER

POWER LEVELADJUSTMENT

FURNACEAC POWER

SWITCH

VACUUMCLEANER

ON/OFF SWITCH

PISTONUP/DOWN SWITCH

CRUCIBLEBUCKETCOMPUTER

MONITOR

KEYBOARD

Figure 4-4 Controls and Indicators

Page 126: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–44 CS230 System Setup

Automatically Transmit Analysis Results

Using this procedure the operator can automatically transmit analysis results after each new analysis.

1. Click Configuration and select Transmission Formats. The Transmission Formats screen will appear.

2. To add a new transmission format to the list, click Add and enter a transmission format name in the row that appears at the bottom of the list.

3. To move a selected transmission format up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

4. To move the selected transmission format down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

5. Select Ascending to list the transmission formats in ascending alphabetical order.

6. Select Descending to list the transmission formats in descending alphabetical order.

7. To delete a transmission format, select it and click Delete.

8. Select a Format by clicking on it.

9. Click the Properties tab or double click the selected transmit format. The Transmission Properties screen will appear.

10. Click the Automation tab. The Automation screen will appear.

Page 127: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–45

11. Click the Check Box to select Transmit Data Automatically after each analysis.

12. Click the Fields tab to select the information to be transmitted.

13. Click the Delimiters tab to select the character to separate fields.

14. Click the Serial Port tab to configure the serial port.

15. Click OK to save any changes and exit.

Page 128: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–46 CS230 System Setup

Configure Maintenance Counters

Maintenance Counters is a list of components and assemblies, within the instrument, that have been determined to require periodic maintenance. An analyses counter will determine when periodic maintenance is needed and alert the operator. After maintenance, a history log of maintenance performed is automatically generated. The counters should not be reset from this procedure. To reset the counters see Reset Maintenance Counters on page 6–26.

• The Furnace Counter sets the autocleaner clean interval.

• To clean after every analysis set the Furnace Counter to Analyses and Stop to 1. To clean after every other analysis set the Furnace Counter to Analyses and Stop to 2.

1. Click Configuration and select Counters. The Counters screen will appear.

2. Click Add to define a maintenance counter

3. Enter the information required in the dialog box. Refer to maintenance counter definitions.

4. To add a new maintenance counter to the list, click Add and enter a name in the row that appears at the bottom of the list.

5. Select Ascending to list the maintenance counter in ascending alphabetical order.

6. Select Descending to list the maintenance counter in descending alphabetical order.

7. To move a selected maintenance counter up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

Note

Example

Page 129: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–47

8. To move the selected maintenance counter down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

9. To remove a counter, select the counter and click Delete. You can only remove a counter that you added.

10. Click OK to close.

Maintenance Counter Definitions

Name—A name or description of the component or assembly that requires periodic maintenance.

Type—An operation, period or amount selected by the operator that is counted. Selections: Analyses, Hours, Days. Default: Analyses.

Count Blanks—Determines if blanks are to be includes as an analysis count. Selections: Yes or No.

Count—The number of times an operation, period or amount occurs before it is reset. An operation, period or amount is defined by type. Examples: hours, days or analyses.

Warning—The determined number of analyses that the analyses counter can reach, before a warning message is displayed, alerting the operator that periodic maintenance is necessary. Analysis will not stop when this counter limit is reached. To turn this function off, enter 0.

Stop—The determined number of analyses that the analyses counter can reach, before the instrument will automatically stop and prevent continued analysis. To turn this function off, enter 0.

Resets—The number of times that the maintenance item was serviced. The resets counter is incremented every time a maintenance item is checked in the maintenance dialog box.

Reset—Displays the date and time the maintenance counter was reset.

Comments—A place for the operator to add notes or comments concerning maintenance.

Page 130: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–48 CS230 System Setup

Configure the Analysis Report

A report of analysis results can be generated and printed on the system printer. Before the report is printed the printed format should be determined. Configuration is the process of formatting the report.

Report Configuration permits the operator to select a tabular report or a report with plots, title the report, select the field to include in the report, select the text font and color and configure the plot.

1. Select the Analysis Results that will be included in the report.

2. Click File and select Print Preview. The Report Settings Screen will appear.

3. Select the Reports tab.

4. Click the Report Format drop down box and select the desired report type.

5. Click the Statistics drop down box and select the desired statistics report type.

Page 131: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–49

6. Enter a Heading Text to title the report.

Select the Fields

• To print fields as they appear on the spreadsheet do not select Define Reports Fields.

A. Select the Fields tab. If the Field tab is not shown check Define Reports Field.

B. Select the fields to display in the report. To show an invisible field, select the field to display and click Show. To hide a visible field, select the field to hide and click Hide

Select the Font

C. Select the Font tab.

D. Select the font name, text style, text size and color.

Configure the Plot

E. Select the Plot tab to format the report plot. Refer to Configure the Spreadsheet, on page 4–51, for Configure Plot Definitions.

Line Printing

• Line Printing permits the operator to print an analysis result on a single line instead on an entire page. To use Line Printing a dot matrix printer should be selected.

F. Select the Reports Tab.

G. Check Line Printing to print the selected samples as a line of text across the page.

H. Check Automatically Print After Each Analysis to print the analysis result after each sample has been analyzed.

7. Click OK to save the report style changes.

8. Click OK to preview the print format.

9. Click Print to print the report. The Printer Configuration screen will appear.

10. Configure the printer if necessary and click OK to print the report on the system printer.

Note

Note

Page 132: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–50 CS230 System Setup

Configure the Screen

Tool Bar

This procedure hides or displays the Toolbar. When displayed the tool bar is located at the top of the screen and is a quick way to perform menu functions without accessing the menus.

1. Click View and select Toolbar. A check indicates the toolbar is displayed.

2. The spreadsheet will automatically display with the Toolbar hidden or with it displayed.

Status Bar

This procedure hides or displays the Status Bar. When displayed the Status Bar is located at the bottom of the screen and displays operational functions of the instrument as they're currently in progress.

1. Click View and select Status Bar. A check indicates the Status Bar is displayed.

2. The spreadsheet will automatically display with the Status Bar hidden or with it displayed.

Page 133: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–51

Configure the Spreadsheet

Configure Spreadsheet customizes the spreadsheet as desired by the operator. The following items of the spreadsheet can be changed.

• Displayed Fields • Font Name

• Font Style • Font Size

• Font Color • Font Effects

• Line Width • Plot Elements

• Reporting Units • Significant Digits

• Precision • Line Width

1. Click Configuration and select Display. The Display Configuration screen will appear.

Page 134: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–52 CS230 System Setup

2. Click Fields to display or hide a spreadsheet field.

3. To show an invisible field, select the field to display and click Show.

4. To hide a visible field, select the field to hide and click Hide.

5. To change the order of fields shown on the spreadsheet, select the Field to move, in the fields list box, and click promote or demote.

6. Click Font to change the font name, style, size, color and effects.

7. Click Element to change the Elements, Reporting Units, Significant Digits, Plot Color, Plot Pattern, and show or hide the Baseline.

8. Click OK to close the Display Configuration screen.

9. Click and edit Locked Columns to stop one or more columns from scrolling when the horizontal scroll bar is moved. The number of columns, from left to right, displayed in the spreadsheet on the main screen, will remain stationary.

10. Click Default to change the display back to the original factory settings.

11. To automatically adjust the cell width to fit the data, click Configuration and select Auto Widths. The cell widths will be automatically adjusted.

Configure Element Definitions

Reporting Units—Permits the operator to select the result units. This will determine the displayed and printed units. Selections: Percent, Milligrams, Area and Parts Per Million.

Significant Digits—The number of significant digits displayed in the result above the plot. Selections: 1 - 6. For PPM the number of significant digits will be limited to the instrument's measurement capability.

Page 135: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–53

Method Development

A method is a set of analytical parameters used to control the instrument during analysis and calculation of the final result. Before analysis, a method must be created. Refer to the method definitions below to help create a method for a specific application.

In addition to creating a method, the methods screen also lists methods that have been created and saved. If it is desired to switch methods, or use an old method for a new application, a method can be selected from this list during the sample login procedure. Refer to Login a Sample on page 5–63.

• This procedure should be performed before a sample is analyzed.

1. Click Configuration and select Methods, the Method screen will appear.

2. Click Add to create a method. A row will be added to the bottom of the spreadsheet.

3. Click a row and enter a method name.

4. Select Ascending to list the methods in ascending alphabetical order.

5. Select Descending to list the methods in descending alphabetical order.

6. To move a selected method up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

Note

Page 136: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–54 CS230 System Setup

7. To move the selected method down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

8. To remove a method, select the method and click Delete. You can only remove a counter that you added.

9. Click Properties. The Method Properties screen will appear.

10. Enter the desired method parameter values for the parameters listed. It will be necessary to select all the parameter types, analysis, element, gas dose and furnace

11. Click OK to close the method properties screen.

12. Select a method and click Clone to copy a method and save it as a different method name. This permits the operator to edit the new method creating a different one.

13. Select a method and click Delete to remove a method,

14. Click OK.

Page 137: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–55

Method Parameter Definitions

Purge Time—The time before analysis when the furnace is closed and atmosphere is purged from the combustion area. Oxygen is flushed into the combustion area to purge atmospheric gas. Default 1 second.

Delay Time—The amount of time permitted to elapse between purge time and analysis. This time period helps establish a stable baseline reference for detection. Default 8 seconds.

Minimum Timeout—The minimum time permitted for analysis. The analysis will last at least this long. Range 10 to 300 seconds. Default 40 seconds.

Comparator Level—An area of the analysis plot, less than peak height, measured as a percentage of peak height that will stop analysis. Refer to Comparator Level page 7–8. Range 0 to 100 percent. Default 1 percent.

Significant Digits—The number of digits displayed in the analysis result. This includes digits to the right and left of the decimal point. Range 0 to 5. Default 3 digits.

Page 138: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–56 CS230 System Setup

Sample Templates

Sample Templates is a quick way for the operator to login a sample and enter a method, comment and description. After a Sample Template has been created refer to Login using a Sample Template on page 5–67.

Create a Sample Template

1. Click the Configuration menu and select Sample Templates the Sample Templates screen will appear.

2. Double click on the last empty cell under the Name column and enter the template name. The cursor must appear before text can be entered.

3. Double click in the other cells to the right of the name cell to enter a method, comment and description into those cells.

4. Click Add to save the sample template.

5. Select Ascending to list the sample templates in ascending alphabetical order.

6. Select Descending to list the sample templates in descending alphabetical order.

7. To move a selected transmission format up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

8. To move the selected transmission format down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

9. To remove a sample template, select the sample template and click Delete.

10. Click OK to close the sample template screen.

Page 139: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–57

Standards

A Calibration Standard is a sample of known type and value. Standards are used to calibrate the instrument for best accuracy. Since calibration standards are usually purchased and their value remains consistent, a list of standard samples and associated information can be stored and accessed when needed.

Standards creates a list of calibration standards for use during calibration. This list can be accessed and found under the Configuration menu.

• A Standard can be used to perform automatic calibration checks if the upper and lower control limits are set and Yes is selected for standard check.

• A Standard cannot be used to calibrate or drift correct a method until it is defined as a Standard.

1. Click Configuration and select Standards. The standards screen will appear.

2. Click Add to list a standard. A row will be added to the bottom of the spreadsheet.

3. Click the row and enter a standard name, lot number, value and control limit.

• If a standard is selected as a check standard and the Lower Control Limit (LCL) or Upper Control Limit (UCL) is exceeded the result will be shown in red in the spreadsheet. This lets the operator know a drift sample should be performed.

• If an LCL or UCL value is not entered analysis will continue regardless of the result data.

Notes

Notes

Page 140: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–58 CS230 System Setup

4. Select Descending to list the transmission formats in descending alphabetical order.

5. To move a selected transmission format up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

6. To move the selected transmission format down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

7. To remove a counter, select the counter and click Delete. You can only remove a counter that you added.

8. Click OK to list the standard.

9. If it becomes necessary to delete a standard select the standard to delete and click Delete.

Standards Definitions

Standard Name—This is the name of the Standard defined by the operator. The part number or lot number of the standard can be used in place of the name.

(Element) Percent—The value of the standard. This is the carbon or sulfur value taken from the label.

Page 141: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–59

System Configuration

System Configuration sets the overall instrument operating settings and parameter values. In addition, the settings for the Serial Port, Balance and Language can be changed. The settings and parameters are listed under system configuration definitions.

1. Click Configuration and select the System. The System Configuration screen will appear.

2. Click the desired configuration tab.

3. Click the edit box next to the right of desired parameter to change and enter the new setting. To select a language from the language tab, click the edit box and select a language.

4. Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to retain the original system configuration.

Page 142: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–60 CS230 System Setup

System Configuration Definitions

System Tab

Significant Digits—The number of digits displayed in all fields of the spreadsheet except the mass and analysis result. The number of digits in the mass field is determined from balance configuration and the number of digits in the result field is determined by the analysis method.

Reduction Heater (Catalyst) Temperature—The set operating temperature of the Measure Flow Catalyst Heater. Range 0-900oC. Default 350oC.

Gas Conservation Timeout—The time in minutes, after analysis, when the instrument automatically switches to the gas conservation mode. Range 0 to 600 minutes. Default 15 minutes.

Gas Conservation Mode—The oxygen flow settings used as gas conservation. Normal oxygen flow is 3 liters per minute. Conservation mode changes the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute. Off turns the oxygen flow completely OFF. Selections are OFF or Conservation.

Autocleaner—Configures the instrument for use with the optional autocleaner. Selections: Enabled (an autocleamer is installed), Disabled (an autocleaner is not installed).

Door Option—Configures the instrument for use with the optional dust eject door. Selections: Enabled (a dust eject door is installed), Disabled (a dust eject door is not installed).

Increment Sample Names—If enabled, and the sample name ends in a number, the number will be automatically incremented by one every time a sample is entered. If there is no number in the sample name one will be added, starting with 2 on the second sample with that name. Standards do not increment. Selections are Enable or Disable.

Nominal Mass—This is the mass automatically entered when performing blank and gas dose analysis. The nominal value is usually 1.000 gram.

Sample Drop Delay—After the crucible is removed from the furnace it’s placed on the platform before it’s dropped into the crucible bucket. This parameter sets the amount of time the crucible remains on the platform to cool before it’s dropped into the crucible bucket.

Page 143: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–61

Enable Quick Loader—Check this box if you have a quick loader (autoloader) in use with the determinator.

Clean Before Load—Check this box to activate the autocleaner and clean the combustion system before loading a sample.

Balance Tab

The Balance Tab is used to configure the balance serial port for communications with an external balance. The serial port used by the balance is COM 2.

1. Click Configuration and select Balance. The Balance Configuration screen will appear.

2. Click the desired configuration tab.

3. Click the edit box next to the right of desired parameter to change and enter the new setting. To select a language from the language tab, click the edit box and select a language.

4. Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to retain the original system configuration.

Page 144: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–62 CS230 System Setup

Balance Definitions

Baud Rate—Select the data transmission speed between the computer and the balance. Selection: 1200 through 19200 bits per second (bps). Default: 1200 bps.

Data Bits—Selects the number of transmitted data bits per byte. Selection: 6 through 8. Default: 7.

Parity—Selects the method of error checking. Selection: Even, Odd or None. Default: Even.

Stop Bits—Selects the number of data bits that are used to signal the end of transmitted data. Selections: 1 or 2. Default: 1.

Tare Command—The command sent from the instrument that causes the balance to tare. Selections are <ESC T>, T, T<CR>LF>.

Send Command— The command sent from the instrument that causes the balance send a mass value back to the instrument. Selections are <ESC>P<CR><LF>, S<CR><LF>, SI<CR><LF>, P0<CR><LF>, and P1<CR><LF>.

Readability (Significant Digits)—The number of significant digits to the right of the mass value transferred from the balance and entered into the spreadsheet. Range 3 to 6. Default: 4.

Page 145: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–63

Set Barometric Pressure

• The local barometric pressure must be known before the barometric pressure can be set.

1. Click Configuration and select Hardware Calibration. The Barometric Calibration screen will appear displaying the last barometric calibration date.

2. Click Next.

3. Wait for the system to stabilize and a barometric pressure reading to appear.

4. Enter the current barometric pressure obtained from a local source.

5. Click Next

6. Click Finished to exit the barometric pressure calibration procedure.

Note

Page 146: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–64 CS230 System Setup

Transmission Formats

Transmission Formats permits the operator to select sample and data transmission parameters to send to the host computer. These include:

• Define Fields

• Define Delimiters

• Transmit Automation

• Serial Port Configuration

• Preview screen for previewing the transmit data format.

• More than one Transmission Format can be defined and selected when desired.

Define Fields

• This procedure is used to select the fields to transmit.

1. Click Configuration and select Transmission Formats.

2. Click Add to create a data transmission format. A row will be added to the bottom of the spreadsheet

Note

Note

Page 147: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–65

3. Click a row and enter a format name.

4. Click Properties. The Transmission Formats Properties screen will appear.

5. Select the Fields tab.

6. For each field to transmit, select the field from the fields list box and click Add to add a field or click Remove to remove a field.

7. To move a selected transmission format up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

8. To move the selected transmission format down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

9. Click the arrow in the Average drop down box to select Off, ON or Group by Sample Name or Prefix.

OFF—Doesn’t average transmitted results.

ON—Averages selected results that are transmitted.

Group by Sample Name or Prefix—Averages a group of sample results to transmit with a common sample name or prefix.

10. Click OK to close the Transmission Formats Properties screen.

Page 148: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–66 CS230 System Setup

Define Delimiters

• A delimiter is a character that separates fields of data. Use this procedure to select the delimiters to transmit.

1. Click Configuration and select Transmission Formats. The Transmission Formats screen will appear.

2. Click the Properties tab. The Transmission Properties screen will appear.

Note

Page 149: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–67

3. Click the Delimiters tab. The Delimiters screen will appear.

4. Click the check boxes and radio buttons to select Format, Headers, Field delimiter, Start of Transmission delimiter, End of Transmission delimiter and Text Format.

• Click the radio button to select “Other” and enter an undefined delimiter.

5. Click OK to close the Delimiters screen.

Note

Page 150: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–68 CS230 System Setup

Communication Settings

1. Click Configuration and select Transmission Formats. The Transmission Formats screen will appear.

2. Click the Properties tab. The Transmission Properties screen will appear.

Page 151: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–69

3. Click the Communications Settings tab. The Communications Settings Configuration screen will appear.

4. Click the radio button and select either Unicode or ASCII encoding.

5. Click the radio button and select Serial Port or Network.

6. Click Configure to configure serial or network communications.

7. If serial port was selected the Serial Port Configuration screen will appear. Select the Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits and Flow Control.

Page 152: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–70 CS230 System Setup

8. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

9. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Page 153: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–71

Preview Transmitted Data

This screen permits the operator to preview the Transmitted Data Format after it is setup. If changes are necessary they can be done before closing this procedure.

1. Click Configuration and select Transmission Formats. The Transmission Formats screen will appear.

2. Select a Transmission Format.

3. Click the Properties tab. The Transmit Data Properties screen will appear.

Page 154: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–72 CS230 System Setup

4. Click the Preview tab. The Transmit Data Preview screen will appear with the transmitted data shown.

5. Click OK to close the Transmit Data Preview screen.

Page 155: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–73

Select Language

• Select Language permits the operator to change the language of the text displayed in the software.

• Select Language will not change the language of the text displayed in the electronic manual.

1. Click the Configuration menu and select Select Language the Select Language screen will appear.

2. Select the desired language and click OK. The display text will appear in the language selected.

Notes

Page 156: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–74 CS230 System Setup

Users

Users permits the laboratory manager to assign users (operators), passwords and grant permissions to the assigned operator. Permissions are selected instrument procedures and functions that are available to the operator. Users adds security to the system and prevents unauthorized operations that could cause damage or inaccurate analysis results.

Users are assigned from the Windows operating system. It is important that you’re familiar with the Windows operating system to complete this procedure. For additional information about users refer to the Help files provided with the operating system.

Add User

• You must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to assign Users and Passwords. Refer to Windows Help for more information.

• Although the organization or owner of the instrument usually determines system setup, LECO suggests that the lab manager be given administration privileges and all other users be given limited privileges.

• The procedure should be used for Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP.

1. To add a user using the Windows operating system follow the steps outlined in Windows Help. To access the Windows Help:

A. Click on the Windows Start menu.

B. Click Help.

C. Click the Index tab.

D. Click the entry box and type “users”

E. From the list click “adding users”.

F. Follow the Help procedure.

2. When finished close Windows Help.

Notes

Page 157: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–75

Assign User Functions

• You must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to Assign User Functions.

1. Click Configuration and select Users. The Users screen will appear.

Note

Page 158: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–76 CS230 System Setup

2. Click Properties, the User Properties screen will appear.

3. Click the desired permission check boxes to select the functions the user can or cannot access. An X indicates access is granted.

4. Click OK to close and save the user selected functions.

• To prevent a user from making changes to their account and other accounts the Administrator creating the user account must make sure Edit Users is NOT checked when the account is created.

Note

Page 159: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–77

Sample Filters

Sample filters permits the operator to display sample data based on a predefined requirement. Fields can be selected to display a certain name or value. Fields can also be mathematically compared and displayed according to a requirement.

There are three predefined fields:

All Samples—displays all the sample data in the database.

Today’s Samples—displays all samples run today.

Method samples—displays all the samples run using a Method.

Apply a Filter and Sort Sample Data

1. From the Configuration menu, click Sample Filters. The Sample Filters dialog box will appear.

• The filters All Samples and Today’s Samples will always appear. In addition, a filter will appear for each defined method.

2. Select a sample filter and click OK. The dialog box will disappear and the sample grid will reappear with the filter applied.

3. Click Cancel to exit without applying the filter.

Note

Page 160: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–78 CS230 System Setup

Define a Filter to Apply

1. From the Configuration menu, click Sample Filters. The Sample Filters Selection dialog box will appear.

2. Click Add to define and add a sample filter to the list. A new filter with the filter name New Filter will be added to the list.

3. To define the new filter select New Filter and click Properties. The Properties Dialog Box will appear.

4. From the Properties Dialog Box you can define the filter.

5. Click the Filter Name to enter and change the filter name. This is the name that will appear in the Sample Filter Selection dialog box.

Page 161: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–79

6. Click the cell under Field and enter a sample field to sort. As examples, you can sort on sample name or method. A drop down arrow will appear. Select the desired field from the list.

7. Click the cell under With to select the value. As an example, the field name can be a specific sample name. Equal will automatically appear in the Compare field.

8. If you enter a numeric value in the With field click the compare cell and enter the desired operator. Operators are; equal, greater than, greater than or equal, less than, or less than equal. The filed name will be sorted with the value using the compare operator.

9. For multiple criteria select And/Or in the first column.

10. Select a filter and click Fields to select the fields to display when the filter is used.

11. Select a filter and click Delete to delete the filter.

Automatically Reapply the Sample Filter

"Automatically Reapply Sample Filters" should be used to reapply filters that select different samples at different times. For example, if you create a filter called "last month's samples" that displays samples from the previous 30 days, it will show samples from the last 30 days when it’s first applied. If it’s not reapplied for another 60 days then by that point it will have samples from the previous 90 days—the samples that originally matched the filter plus all the new ones added since. To prevent this from happening, automatically reapply the filter every day, preferably at a time when the instrument isn’t being used.

The start time is the first time the sample filter will be refreshed. The frequency controls subsequent refreshes. If you set the start time to today at 8:30 PM, then if you set the refresh to every 12 hours it will refresh at 8:30 PM tonight, 8:30 AM tomorrow morning, 8:30 PM tomorrow night, etc. If you set the refresh to every 2 days, then it would update at 8:30 PM tonight, 8:30 PM two days from now, etc.

Page 162: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–80 CS230 System Setup

1. From the Configuration menu, click Sample Filters. The Sample Filters dialog box will appear.

2. Select the filter to automatically apply and click Properties. The Properties Dialog Box will appear.

3. Check Automatically Reapply Sample Filters.

4. Enter the time, date and update frequency.

Page 163: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–81

User Defined Fields

User Defined Fields is used to add unique fields to the spreadsheet and sample login screen. The field can include a formula for calculation or contain only text.

1. From the Configuration menu, click User Defined Fields. The User Defined Fields dialog box opens.

2. Click the Add button to add a user defined field to the spreadsheet. The field will also appear on the Sample Login screen.

3. Click in the cell under name and enter a name for the added field.

4. If the field will be used for a calculation enter a formula for calculation within the field. Refer to Functions on page 4–83.

5. Check Read Only to restrict the operator from making changes to the field.

6. Check Numeric to restrict text from the field and only display numeric information.

7. Under Format enter the number formatting. Refer to Number Formatting on page 4–59.

8. Click OK to add the new user defined field to the spreadsheet and sample login screen.

Page 164: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–82 CS230 System Setup

• The term “exp” means expression, which may be a single number or a function that returns a number.

• The term “cond(x)” means a comparison user (<, >, =, etc. . . ) or the @AND, @OR, and @XOR functions.

• The @IF function evaluates its condition expression and then performs the operations in either the “true” or “false” section.

• The examples below illustrate how the different functions may be used. To help illustrate this, the concentration values for N and N2 will be defined as 0.8767 and as 1.0276 respectively.

Notes

Page 165: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–83

Functions

Function Definition

+ Plus

- Minus

* Multiply

/ Divide

^ Raise to the power

= Equal

!= Not equal

> Greater than

>= Greater than or equal to

< Less than

<= Less than or equal to

Page 166: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–84 CS230 System Setup

Function Definition Example Function Result

[“Analyte Name”] Analyte concentration value

[Sulfur ppm] 0.8767

@Average(“<element name>”)

Average Analyte Concentration Value

@Average [Sulfur ppm] 0.8767

@ABS(exp) Absolute value @ABS [Sulfur ppm]-[ Sulfur Blank]

-0.1509

@LOG10(exp) Log base 10 @LOG10 [Sulfur ppm] -0.0571

@Log(exp) Natural log @Log [Sulfur] -0.1316

@SQRT(exp) Square root @SQRT [Sulfur] 0.9363

@Maximum(exp1, exp2) Finds Maximum @Maximum [Sulfur ppm]-, [Sulfur Blank]

1.0276

@Minimum(exp1, exp2) Finds Minimum @Minimum [Sulfur ppm]-, [Sulfur Blank]

0.8767

@Calculate(exp, “Format”)

Number Format (final answer)

@Calculate [Sulfur ppm], “F3.2”

1.03

@SigFigs(exp, ‘Format”) Number Format (may be used in further calculations)

@SigFigs([Sulfur ppm], “F3.2”)

1.03

@IF(cond, true, false) If conditional @IF([N]>1.0, [Sulfur ppm], [Sulfur ppm])

0.8767

@AND(cond1, cond2) Logical and @IF(@AND([Sulfur ppm]>=1, [Sulfur ppm]>1), [Sulfur ppm], [Sulfur ppm])

0.8767

@OR(cond1, cond2) Logical or @IF(@OR([Sulfur ppm]>1, [Sulfur ppm]>1), [Sulfur ppm], [Sulfur ppm])

1.0276

@XOR(cond1, cond2) Exclusive or @IF(@XOR([Sulfur ppm]>1, [Sulfur ppm]>1), [Sulfur ppm], [Sulfur ppm])

1.0276

Page 167: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

System Setup CS230 4–85

Number Formatting

Formatting creates a string representation of the floating point numeric value from the supplied format string:

[A|, [Sn.m], [En.m], [n.m], [#~##.#~###] and [In]

where:

A = Specifies automatic or default format. Also used if format field is blank.

S = Specified scientific notation. When used with F,S,E or I, # preceding the decimal define significant digits and # after the decimal m define precision.

E = Specifies engineering format (Scientific format where exponent mod 3 == 0).

F = Specifies the number of specific digits.

I = Specifies integer.

n = Specifies the number of significant digits to be represented. When n is not specified the default value is DBL_DIG.

m = Specifies the maximum number of digits after the decimal place. When m is not specified the default value is DBL_DIG.

Examples:

0.123456 F4.5 0.1235

0.000789 F3.5 0.00079

0.000789 F3.2 0.00

321.8765 F3.5 322

0.123456 S4.5 1.234E-1

0.000789 S3.5 7.9E-4

0.000789 S3.2 0.00E+0

321.8765 S3.5 3.22E+2

0.123456 E4.5 123.5E-3

0.000789 E3.5 790E-6

0.000789 E3.2 0.00E+0

321.8765 E3.5 322E+0

321.8765 I2 320

Page 168: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

4–86 CS230 System Setup

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 169: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–1

5 5 Operation

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed on page 5–47.

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 5–6.

Keypad Operation Contents:

Operation Guidelines...........................................................5–6 Before an Analysis .........................................................5–7 After an Analysis ...........................................................5–8 After Use......................................................................5–8

Crucibles...........................................................................5–9 Sample Preparation .......................................................... 5–10

Sample Size................................................................ 5–10 High Sulfur Samples .................................................... 5–10

Blank Samples ....................................................... 5–10 Analyze Menu .................................................................. 5–11

Screen Description....................................................... 5–11 Delete Weight ............................................................. 5–13 Insert Weight.............................................................. 5–14 Print Weights .............................................................. 5–15 System Controls.......................................................... 5–16

Definitions and Ranges ............................................ 5–17 Clean Switch............................................................... 5–18

Operation

Windows®

Keypad

Keypad

Page 170: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–2 CS230 Operation

With Autocleaner .................................................... 5–18 Without Autocleaner................................................ 5–19

Balance Weight ........................................................... 5–20 Transmit Last.............................................................. 5–21 Select Method ............................................................. 5–22

Sample Weight Entry ........................................................ 5–23 Sample Analysis ............................................................... 5–25 Calibrate Menu................................................................. 5–27

Calibration Results Format Selection............................... 5–28 Clear Selection............................................................ 5–29 Calculate Calibration .................................................... 5–30 Edit Calibration ........................................................... 5–32 Calculate Blank ........................................................... 5–33 Edit Blank................................................................... 5–35 Recalculate Results ...................................................... 5–36

Results Menu ................................................................... 5–38 Results Format Selection .............................................. 5–40 Clear Selections .......................................................... 5–41 Delete Selected Results ................................................ 5–42 Statistics .................................................................... 5–43

Definitions ............................................................. 5–44 Print Selected Results .................................................. 5–45 Transmit Selected Results............................................. 5–46

Operation for Windows® .................................................... 5–47 Windows Software Menus .................................................. 5–52

File Menu ................................................................... 5–52 Print ..................................................................... 5–52 Print Preview ......................................................... 5–52 Print Setup ............................................................ 5–52 Exit ...................................................................... 5–52

Edit Menu................................................................... 5–53 Insert ................................................................... 5–53 Fill........................................................................ 5–53 Cut....................................................................... 5–53 Copy..................................................................... 5–53 Paste .................................................................... 5–53

Windows®

Page 171: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–3

View Menu.................................................................. 5–54 Tool Bar ................................................................ 5–54 Status Bar ............................................................. 5–54 First Row............................................................... 5–54 Analysis Row.......................................................... 5–54 Last Row ............................................................... 5–54

Samples Menu ............................................................ 5–55 Login .................................................................... 5–55 Balance................................................................. 5–55 Analyze................................................................. 5–55 Abort .................................................................... 5–55 Pause ................................................................... 5–56 Queued Samples .................................................... 5–56 Promote ................................................................ 5–56 Promote: Analyze Next............................................ 5–56 Demote................................................................. 5–56 Recalculate ............................................................ 5–56 Transmit ............................................................... 5–56 Text Import Data.................................................... 5–56 Text Export Data .................................................... 5–57 Text Export Buffers ................................................. 5–57 Delete................................................................... 5–57

Configuration Menu...................................................... 5–58 Calibrations ........................................................... 5–58 Blank.................................................................... 5–58 Drift ..................................................................... 5–58 Linearizations......................................................... 5–59 Standards.............................................................. 5–59 Methods ................................................................ 5–59 Counters ............................................................... 5–59 Sample Templates .................................................. 5–59 User Defined Fields ................................................. 5–59 System ................................................................. 5–59 Users.................................................................... 5–60 Transmission Formats ............................................. 5–60 Select Language..................................................... 5–60

Page 172: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–4 CS230 Operation

Auto Widths........................................................... 5–60 Display.................................................................. 5–60 Sample filters......................................................... 5–60 Hardware Calibrations ............................................. 5–60

Diagnostics Menu ........................................................ 5–61 Leak Check............................................................ 5–61 Ambients............................................................... 5–61 Switches ............................................................... 5–61 Solenoids .............................................................. 5–61 Comport................................................................ 5–61

Maintenance Menu....................................................... 5–62 Login .................................................................... 5–62 View Log File.......................................................... 5–62

Login a Sample ................................................................ 5–63 Sample Login Definitions .............................................. 5–65 Balance Login ............................................................. 5–66 Login using a Sample Template ..................................... 5–67

Analyze a Sample............................................................. 5–68 Pause / Delay Analysis ...................................................... 5–69

Remove a Programmed Pause or Delay........................... 5–70 Delete a Sample............................................................... 5–71 Print Sample Results ......................................................... 5–72 Transmit ......................................................................... 5–74 Recalculate Result ............................................................ 5–75 Calibration....................................................................... 5–76

Blank Calibration ......................................................... 5–76 Standard Calibration .................................................... 5–76 Drift Correction ........................................................... 5–76

Blank Calibration .............................................................. 5–77 Standard Calibration ......................................................... 5–78

Standard Calibration Definitions................................ 5–80 Drift Correction ................................................................ 5–81

Drift Correction ........................................................... 5–82 Data Management ............................................................ 5–83

Insert Data into the Spreadsheet ................................... 5–83 Insert a Sample Out-of-Sequence .................................. 5–84

Page 173: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–5

Fill Selected Cells with the Same Values.......................... 5–84 Select First Row in the Spreadsheet ............................... 5–85 Select the Analysis Row in the Spreadsheet..................... 5–85 Select Last Row in the Spreadsheet................................ 5–85

Export Data ..................................................................... 5–86 Export Configuration .................................................... 5–86

Filename ............................................................... 5–86 Export Definitions .............................................. 5–87

Fields.................................................................... 5–88 Delimiters.............................................................. 5–89 Automation............................................................ 5–90 Advanced .............................................................. 5–91 Preview................................................................. 5–92

Text Export Data ......................................................... 5–93 Export Text Buffers...................................................... 5–94

Import Data .................................................................... 5–95 Transmit Selected Samples ................................................ 5–96 Clipboard Use .................................................................. 5–97

Cut Data to the Clipboard ............................................. 5–97 Copy Data to the Clipboard ........................................... 5–97 Paste Data from the Clipboard....................................... 5–97

Configure Result Plot......................................................... 5–98 Display the Menu......................................................... 5–98

Selection Procedures............................................... 5–98

Page 174: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–6 CS230 Operation

Operation Guidelines

Listed below are guidelines that should be followed before analysis, after analysis and after use. By using this information, along with the procedures in the Operation Chapter, the operator will be able to obtain the best possible performance from this instrument.

• Do not turn the AC power off to the instrument unless it malfunctions or it's not going to be used for an extended period of time.

• If the gas is turned off for eight hours or more, do not perform an analysis until the gas has been turned on for at least one hour.

• The piston should be left up with the crucible removed when the furnace is not in use.

• Refer to Before Analysis for before analysis guidelines.

• Refer to After Analysis for after analysis guidelines.

• Refer to After Use for after use guidelines.

Note

Page 175: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–7

Before an Analysis

Before a sample can be analyzed and an accurate result obtained, the instrument must be prepared for analysis. This includes inspecting and cleaning the combustion system o-rings, performing a system leak check, selecting or creating a method, performing a blank calibration and then performing a standard calibration.

• This procedure prepares the instrument for analysis, not the sample. Refer to Sample Preparation on page 5–10 for sample preparation procedures.

• Some of the following procedures can be performed from the DSP Keypad or from Windows®. Refer to the pages that apply to your instrument.

1. Perform daily maintenance before the start of analysis.

A. Inspect and grease the Combustion O-rings. Refer to Combustion Zone O-rings, page 6–16.

B. Clean the Autocleaner and Mesh Filter. Refer to Autocleaner, page 6–6.

C. Perform a Leak Check. Refer to page 8–10 or 8–19.

2. Verify that the gas is turned on.

3. Verify that the oven is on and reached the proper temperature. Refer to Ambient Monitor, page 8–5 or 8–22.

4. Select or create a Method to use for analysis. Reference application notes to determine the method parameter values to enter. Refer to Method Development page 4–32 or 4–53.

5. Analyze 3 to 5 blank conditioning samples. This will purge the system before analysis.

6. Analyze 3 to 5 blanks and perform a Blank Calibration. This will set the blank calibration value. Refer to Blank Calibration page 5–33 or 5–77.

7. Analyze a Blank Check Sample to determine if the blank value was set properly. Refer to Login a Sample page 5–23 or 5–63.

8. Perform a Drift Correction and analyze 3 to 5 standard samples. This will set the drift correction value. Refer to Drift Correction page 5–81 (Windows® Only).

Notes

Page 176: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–8 CS230 Operation

9. Analyze a Standard Check Sample to determine if the drift value was set properly. Refer to Drift Correction page 5–81 (Windows® Only).

10. At this point the instrument is ready for Sample Analysis. Refer to Analyze a Sample on page 5–25 or 5–68.

After an Analysis

When an analysis is complete, the furnace automatically shuts OFF, a signal sounds, and the spreadsheet shows the final result. If Line Printing and Automatically Print After Each Analysis is selected, the printer will print the analysis result. Refer to Configure the Analysis Report, page 4–48 (Windows® Only).

After Use

The AC power to the instrument should remain on at all times. If the power to the instrument is switched off for any reason a one-hour warm-up is necessary before analyzing samples.

The instrument automatically switches to conservation (low gas flow) after an amount of time specified by the Conservation Time-out in System Configuration, page 4–18 or 4–59.

Remove the crucible from the furnace after use.

• The furnace should be closed except when loading and unloading samples or when maintenance is being performed. If the furnace is left open for an extended period of time, analyze 3 to 5 conditioner samples before resuming normal operation.

Note

Page 177: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–9

Crucibles

When analyzing for low carbon (<0.1%) or low sulfur (<0.01%), ‘burned off’ crucibles yield the best results. Crucibles are burned off by firing them at 1350oC (2500oF) for at least 20 minutes in a TF-1 or TF-10 Tube Furnace, then cooling them in a desiccator. Crucibles must be used within four hours of being burned off or the procedure must be done again.

After the crucibles have been “burned off” handle them with 761-929 crucible tongs to avoid burning your fingers or contaminating the crucibles.

CAUTION

!

Page 178: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–10 CS230 Operation

Sample Preparation

DO NOT touch the crucibles or sample material. Touching them or letting dust accumulate on them will adversely affect analytical results.

Sample Size

The nominal sample weight is 1.0 gram. The lower and upper limits will depend on the sample material analyzed.

High Sulfur Samples

Reduced sample mass is required for samples with 40% or more sulfur content. For these samples use one scoop Iron Chip and one scoop Lecocel® to ensure complete coupling of the sample and RF field.

Blank Samples

Blank samples should be 1 scoop Iron Chip and 1 scoop Lecocel®.

CAUTION

!

Page 179: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–11

Analyze Menu

Access the analyze screen by pressing [1] Analyze from the main menu.

Screen Description

The mode of operation is displayed on the top line.

The second line is the result window. The results of the last analysis (or current analysis if one is in progress) is displayed, followed by the element type. After each analysis, the result is placed at the end of the results list and displayed in the results window. The results list stores up to 50 analyses.

The center block displays the plate current and grid current readings during an analysis.

The lower block displays the current active method, sample ID code and sample weight. On the left side the parameter name is displayed and on the right side the value.

The bottom line displays the number of sample weights that have been entered. The highlight indicates the position currently displayed in the weight list.

• Before analyzing any samples, select the appropriate analysis method parameter values. Refer to Select Method, page 5–22, for more details.

Analyze

0.01010% Carbon

0.02020% Sulfur

Plate [ ] 0mA Grid [ ] 0mA Method 1-Method ID Code A0000001 Weight 1.0000 1 2 3

Note

Page 180: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–12 CS230 Operation

Weight is the sample weight value in grams. Nominal sample weight is 1 gram. Samples to be analyzed are taken in the same order as they were placed in the sample weight list. The operator must identify and arrange the samples to match the order of the sample weight entries. The sample weight list will store up to 10 sample weights in the order in which the samples were entered.

ID Code assigns a specific label to an analyzed sample for identification.

Page 181: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–13

Delete Weight

• Delete weight removes the highlighted sample weight and ID code from the sample weights list.

• To delete a weight, the cursor must highlight the weight to be deleted on the bottom line of the analyze screen.

1. While in the sample weights list, press Next/Previous to select the weight to be deleted.

2. Access the analyze menu by pressing Menu from the analyze screen.

3. Press [1] Delete Weight to delete the weight from the weight list.

Notes

Analyze

[1] Delete Weight [2] Insert Weight [3] Print Weights [4] System Controls [5] Clean Switch [6] Balance Weight [7] Transmit Last [8] Select Method

Page 182: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–14 CS230 Operation

Insert Weight

• Insert weight inserts a sample weight and ID code before the position highlighted in the sample weight list.

1. Press Next/Previous to move along the bottom line of the screen and select the position in the weight list to insert a weight.

2. From the analyze menu, press [2] Insert Weight to insert a weight into the weight list. The analyze screen will appear with the weight block highlighted.

3. Enter the weight from the keypad, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the digit to edit and enter the value from the keypad.

• It is also possible to use the balance for automatic weight entry.

Note

Note

Analyze

0.01010% Carbon

0.02020% Sulfur

Plate [ ] 0mA Grid [ ] 0mA Method 1-Method ID Code A0000001 Weight 1.0000 1 2 3

Page 183: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–15

Print Weights

• Print weights permits the operator to receive a printout of the ID code and sample weight list.

• If there are no weights in the sample weights list, the printer will not print when print weights is selected.

• Weights cannot be printed while an analysis is in progress.

1. To select print weights, the analyze menu must be displayed.

2. From the analyze menu, press [3] Print Weights. The operator will receive a printout of the ID codes and sample weights in the weight list. After the weights are printed, the analyze screen will appear.

Notes

Analyze

[1] Delete Weight [2] Insert Weight [3] Print Weights [4] System Controls [5] Clean Switch [6] Balance Weight [7] Transmit Last [8] Select Method

Page 184: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–16 CS230 Operation

System Controls

• System controls permits the operator to manually select the analysis mode and change the carrier gas flow status, or set the clean counter value and the clean interval value.

• Although the carrier gas flow status can be set by system controls, it will automatically change as determined by the gas conservation time. Refer to System Configuration.

1. From the analyze menu, press [4] System Controls. The System Controls screen will appear.

2. Press Select to scroll through the system controls parameters. Refer to the Definitions and Ranges, on page 5–17.

3. Enter the value from the keypad or press the arrow keys to move the cursor into position to change a digit value.

4. Press Menu to display the system controls menu.

5. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the system control parameters.

6. Press Exit to remove the system controls menu and return to the setup menu.

Notes

System Controls

Analysis Mode Auto Carrier Gas Off Clean Counter 17 Clean Interval 10

System Controls

[1] Print

Page 185: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–17

Definitions and Ranges

Analysis Mode—Selects the analysis mode of operation, either automatic or manual. In the automatic mode, analysis begins when the piston is raised. In the manual mode, analysis begins when the piston is raised and the start button is pressed. Default: Auto

Carrier Gas—Selects the oxygen flow: On, Off, or Conserve. Oxygen flow can be monitored by observing the oxygen flow rotameter located on the front panel of the instrument. Default: Off

Clean Counter—This parameter keeps track of the number of analyses performed before a cleaning cycle. The counter resets to zero after each cleaning cycle. If the furnace is cleaned manually before the preset interval, reset the counter to zero before operation begins. Default: 0

Furnace Clean Interval—The number of analyses performed before cleaning the furnace. The message Cleaning Time prints when the interval has elapsed. If the autocleaner is installed, the autoclean cycle is initiated when the interval elapses. Default: 20

Page 186: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–18 CS230 Operation

Clean Switch

The clean switch function has two modes of operation; with autocleaner installed or without autocleaner installed. The clean switch can be used in either mode to close the furnace without starting an analysis.

During the cleaning process, the vacuum cleaner will automatically turn on if the autocleaner is installed. If the autocleaner is not installed, the vacuum cleaner must be turned on manually.

If the autocleaner is installed, refer to clean counter and furnace clean interval. These parameters will determine when the combustion tube is automatically cleaned.

With Autocleaner

1. From the analyze menu, choose [5] Clean Switch. The piston will drop to the sample load position and the dust eject door will close.

2. As the process continues, the vacuum cleaner will turn on and the autocleaner will brush the lance filter and combustion area. Dirt left from the combustion process will flow down the combustion tube and be sucked into the vacuum cleaner.

3. After the cleaning process is complete, the determinator will beep.

4. Press [5] Clean Switch to raise the lower seal assembly without starting an analysis. At this point, the next sample can be loaded.

5. After the cleaning, pressing the piston switch will close the furnace and start an analysis automatically if a weight is entered in the weight list.

• The operator should load the next sample on the pedestal before pressing the piston switch.

Note

Page 187: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–19

Without Autocleaner

1. From the analyze menu, choose [5] Clean Switch. The piston will drop to the sample load position.

2. Remove the pedestal from the lower seal assembly.

3. Attach the vacuum cleaner hose to the cleaning cup, position the cleaning cup onto the lower seal assembly, and press the piston switch. The cleaning cup and lower seal assembly will rise.

4. Remove the lance flow fitting and filter cap from the filter head assembly.

5. Turn the vacuum cleaner on and brush the filter and combustion area with the wire brush. The dirt left from the combustion process will flow down the combustion tube and be sucked into the vacuum cleaner.

6. Turn the vacuum cleaner off and press the piston switch to release the cleaning cup.

7. Use the wire lance cleaner to clean the lance.

8. Remove the cleaning cup, replace the filter cap, and reinstall the lance flow fitting and pedestal.

9. Press the piston switch to close the lower seal assembly.

10. Press [5] Clean Switch to raise the lower seal assembly without starting an analysis.

11. After the cleaning, pressing the piston switch will close the furnace and start an analysis automatically if a weight is entered in the weight list.

• The operator should load the next sample on the pedestal before pressing the piston switch.

Note

Page 188: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–20 CS230 Operation

Balance Weight

• Balance weight permits the operator to enter a weight from the balance when the determinator is in the manual weight entry mode.

• If a key is pressed from the analyze screen to edit a parameter, the determinator will automatically switch to the manual weight entry mode.

1. Before using balance weight, be certain that the proper position in the weight stack is selected. The current weight in the weight stack will be overwritten.

2. Normal or remote must be selected for the balance mode. If None is selected, balance weight will not appear on the analyze menu. Refer to Balance Options, page 4–23.

3. From the analyze screen, press Menu. The analyze menu will be displayed.

4. From the analyze menu, press [6] Balance Weight. If the normal mode was selected the weight displayed on the balance will be displayed on the instrument. Remote is displayed if the balance was set to the remote mode.

Notes

Analyze

[1] Delete Weight [2] Insert Weight [3] Print Weights [4] System Controls [5] Clean Switch [6] Balance Weight [7] Transmit Last [8] Select Method

Page 189: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–21

Transmit Last

• Transmit last permits the operator to transmit the results of the last analysis to a peripheral device.

• To configure data transmit for operation with a specific peripheral device, refer to the System Setup chapter.

• Transmit enable must be set to no.

1. To select transmit last, the analyze menu must be displayed.

2. From the analyze screen, press Menu. The analyze menu will be displayed.

3. From the analyze menu, press [7] Transmit Last. The results of the last analysis will be transmitted to a peripheral device. After the results are transmitted the analyze screen will be displayed.

Notes

Analyze

[1] Delete Weight [2] Insert Weight [3] Print Weights [4] System Controls [5] Clean Switch [6] Balance Weight [7] Transmit Last [8] Select Method

Page 190: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–22 CS230 Operation

Select Method

• Select method permits the operator to quickly select an defined analysis method.

• Up to five Analysis Methods can be defined from the analysis method menu and selected from this menu.

• Each analysis method can be calibrated separately. Refer to Calibrate Menu, page 5–27.

1. From the analyze screen, press Menu. The analyze menu will be displayed.

2. From the analyze menu, press [8] Select Method. The select method menu will be displayed.

3. Select the desired method. The analyze screen will be displayed.

Notes

Analyze

[1] Delete Weight [2] Insert Weight [3] Print Weights [4] System Controls [5] Clean Switch [6] Balance Weight [7] Transmit Last [8] Select Method

Analyze

[1] Method - 1 [2] Method - 2 [3] Method - 3 [4] Method - 4 [5] Method - 5

Page 191: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–23

Sample Weight Entry

• Up to 10 sample weights can be stored in the sample weight list.

• A highlight without a weight position number indicates the sample weight must be entered.

• The optional balance must be configured to match the selected balance weight mode. Refer to the Options on page 1–33.

1. There are four types of weight entry that can be used. The following procedures describe the use of each entry.

A. None—Without Optional Balance.

1) Sample weight(s) are entered using the keypad.

2) The next key is used after a sample weight has been entered to advance the cursor for the next sample.

B. Remote—With Optional Balance.

1) Place the crucible on the balance pan and press Tare on the balance.

2) Add the sample material. When the balance stabilizes, press Print on the balance to enter the sample weight in the sample weight list. The system will automatically advance to the next sample each time the print key on the balance is pressed. Press print only once for each weight to be entered.

C. Normal—With Optional Balance.

1) Place the crucible on the balance pan and press Tare on the balance.

2) Add the sample material. When the balance stabilizes, press Next on the determinator keypad to enter the sample weight in the sample weight list.

Notes

Page 192: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–24 CS230 Operation

D. Auto Tare—With Optional Balance.

1) Place the crucible on the balance pan. The balance will automatically tare for weights over 15 grams.

2) Add the sample material. When the balance stabilizes press Next on the determinator keypad to enter the sample weight in the sample weight list.

2. The select key can be used to move the cursor (highlight) to edit the sample ID code.

• The ID code will advance as weights are entered.

3. A number key can be pressed at anytime to manually enter a weight into a highlighted sample weight position.

4. The operator can return to the auto-weigh mode by selecting menu [6] Balance Weight.

Note

Page 193: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–25

Sample Analysis

• All steps in Installation, Initial Power-up, System Check, and System Setup should be completed before analyzing samples.

• Accurate analysis results are only obtained after the instrument has been calibrated. Refer to the Calibrate Menu, page 5–27.

• Before analysis, set the analysis method, system options and system control parameters. Refer to page 4–32, Analysis Method Menu, page 4–18, System Setup, and System Controls, page 5–16.

1. The gas supplies should be on.

• For best results, turn the power off only if the instrument malfunctions. This eliminates the warm-up time delay.

2. Carrier gas should be on. Refer to System Controls page 5–16.

3. Choose [1] Analyze from the main menu to display the analyze screen.

4. Load one scoop of Lecocel 2 Accelerator and a Steel Ring Standard into the Ceramic Crucible.

5. In the analyze screen, enter the sample weight. Then press Select and enter the ID code. Or, after entering the sample weight, pressing Next will enter the sample weight.

Notes

Note

Analyze

0.01010% Carbon

0.02020% Sulfur

Plate [ ] 0mA Grid [ ] 0mA Method 1-Method ID Code A0000001 Weight 1.0000 1 2 3

Page 194: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–26 CS230 Operation

• Up to 10 sample weights may be stored in the weight list.

6. Place the crucible and sample onto the pedestal and press Piston Up/Down. If the determinator is configured for automatic operation, the sample will be loaded into the furnace and analysis will begin. If the determinator is configured for manual operation, press Start to begin the analysis after the piston rises and the sample is loaded into the furnace.

7. Adjust the furnace power control for the proper plate current that varies maximum induction power. Maximum plate current should be limited to 500 mA to extend the oscillator tube life.

8. After the sample is analyzed, the results are displayed on the analyze screen and stored in the results list. Press Piston Up/Down to lower the piston and remove the crucible.

• The results list stores the last 50 sample results analyzed.

9. Repeat this procedure for five samples. Refer to the Calibrate Menu, page 5–27, and calculate a new calibration factor.

10. Load one scoop of Lecocel 2 Accelerator into the ceramic crucible. From the keypad, enter a weight of 1 grams. Run five blanks. Refer to Calibrate Blank, page 5–33, to determine the blank value.

HIGH TEMPERATURE HAZARD After the sample burns, the crucible is very hot. Use tongs to remove the crucible from the furnace and pedestal. Allow the crucible to cool before touching the crucible.

Note

Note

WARNING

Page 195: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–27

Calibrate Menu

• Calibration is generally accomplished using standard samples (samples with known elemental concentrations). The operator must run at least three analyses of a standard reference material with a known elemental concentration.

• The calibration value is the slope of a linear calibration while the blank is the intercept of the linear calibration.

1. From the main menu, press [3] Calibrate. The calibrate results screen will appear.

2. Press the Next/Previous keys to move the cursor down and up the list of results.

3. Press Select to include a sample and move the cursor up.

4. Press Yes to include a sample. The included sample(s) will remain highlighted.

5. Press No to exclude a sample. The excluded sample(s) will not be highlighted.

6. Press Menu to display the calibrate menu.

Notes

Select Results

Select Results ID Code Carbon Sulfur A0000001 0.030 0.00169A0000002 0.033 0.00796A0000003 0.032 0.00855A0000004 0.033 0.00654A0000005 0.034 0.00776A0000006 0.030 0.00528>A0000007 0.031 0.00487 0 Selected 1 of 7

Select Results ID Code Carbon

0 Selected 1 of 7

[1] Record Format [2] List Format [3] Clear Selections [4] Calculate Calib [5] Edit Calibration [6] Calculate Blank [7] Edit Blank [8] Recalculate

Page 196: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–28 CS230 Operation

Calibration Results Format Selection

• There are two calibration result formats to select from: Record Format and List Format.

• See the Results Menu, page 5–38, for more information on Record Format, List Format, and Clear Selections commands.

1. Press [1] Record Format from the results menu to display the selected results in the record format.

• The record format is the same as the select results screen which can display up to eleven results at a time.

2. Press Menu to return to the select results screen.

3. Press [2] List Format to display the selected results in the list format. The list format screen will appear with the sample result indicated, by an arrow on the record format screen, displayed.

• The list format displays one result at a time with more information provided per result.

4. Press Menu to return to the results menu.

Notes

Note

Note

Select Results

ID Code A0000001 Weight 1.0000 Method Name 1-Method Carbon Sulfur Results 0.8921 0.0034 Calib. 0.7863 1.3017 Blank 0.0000 0.0000 Time 40 44 Peak 16462 149 0 Selected: 1 of 7

Page 197: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–29

Clear Selection

• Clear Selection removes the highlight from selected results quickly, giving the operator the opportunity to select other results.

1. With results selected in the select results screen, press the Menu key. The calibration menu will be displayed.

2. Press [3] Clear Selections to remove the highlight from all selected results. The select results screen will be displayed.

Note

Select Results ID Code Carbon

0 Selected 1 of 7

[1] Record Format [2] List Format [3] Clear Selections [4] Calculate Calib [5] Edit Calibration [6] Calculate Blank [7] Edit Blank [8] Recalculate

Page 198: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–30 CS230 Operation

Calculate Calibration

• Calculate calibration allows the operator to calibrate the instrument based upon a previously analyzed standard.

• A minimum of three to five analyses of a known standard should be completed before calculate calibration is performed.

• Standard sample results must be selected from the select results screen before calculate calibration is attempted.

1. Press [4] Calculate Calibration from the calibrate menu to display the calculate calibration screen.

2. To edit the standard value, enter the value from the keyboard, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit position and enter the digit value with the keypad.

3. Press Yes to continue and display the calibration results screen.

Notes

Calculate Calib

Carbon Yes Standard 0.35400 Sulfur Yes Standard 0.05400 Option: Yes Y/N

Calibrate Results

Carbon Yes Standard 0.35400 Sulfur Yes Standard 0.05400 Option: Yes Y/N

Page 199: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–31

4. Press Menu to display the calibration results menu, or Exit to return to the select results screen and save the new calibration values.

A. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the calibration values on the system printer. The new calibration values will be saved, and the calibration results screen displayed.

B. Press [2] Reset Calibration to reset the new calibration values and return to the old calibration values.

5. Press Exit to return to the select results screen. The new calibration value will be saved. If reset calibration was selected, the old calibration value will be saved.

Calibration Results

[1] Print [2] Reset Calib.

Page 200: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–32 CS230 Operation

Edit Calibration

• Edit calibration permits the operator to change the calibration by entering the calibration value.

• This procedure can be used to enter a predetermined value or used to replace a calibration value that was lost.

1. Choose [5] Edit Calibration from the calibrate menu to display the edit calibration screen.

2. To edit the calibration value, enter the value from the keyboard, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit and enter the digit value with the keypad.

3. Press Menu to display the calibration results menu, or Exit to return to the select results screen and save the new calibration values.

4. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the calibration values on the system printer. The new calibration values will be saved and the calibration results screen displayed.

5. Press Exit to return to the select results screen and save the new calibration values.

Notes

Edit Calibration

Carbon Old Calib 1.0512

New Calib 1.1617 Sulfur Old Calib 1.0033

New Calib 1.0055

Edit Calibration

[1] Print

Page 201: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–33

Calculate Blank

• Calculate blank permits the operator to take into account the carbon content in the accelerator or contamination in the system or carrier gas. Refer to page 4–34, Definitions, Ranges and Defaults.

• Blank sample results must be selected from the select results screen before calculate blank is attempted.

• Use a sample weight of 1.0000 gram.

1. Press [6] Calculate Blank from the calibrate menu to display the edit blank standard screen.

2. To edit the blank value, enter the value from the keyboard, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit and enter the digit value with the keypad.

3. Press Yes to calculate the new blank value, and display the blank calculation screen.

Notes

Calculate Blank

Carbon Standard 0.0000 Sulfur Standard 0.0000

Blank Results

Carbon Old Blank 0.0000 New Blank 0.0012 Sulfur Old Blank 0.0000 New Blank 0.0010

Page 202: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–34 CS230 Operation

4. Press Menu to display the blank results menu.

5. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the new blank calibration values.

6. Press Exit to return to the select results screen and save the calculated blank results.

Blank Results

[1] Print

Page 203: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–35

Edit Blank

• Edit blank permits the operator to change the blank calibration value by entering a new blank value.

• This procedure can only be used to enter a predetermined value. Normal blank calibration should be performed using calculate blank.

1. Press [7] Edit Blank from the calibrate menu to display the edit blank screen.

2. To edit the calibration value, enter the value from the keyboard, or press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit and enter the digit value with the keypad.

3. Press Menu to display the blank results menu.

4. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the new blank calibration values.

5. Press Exit to return to the select results screen and save the edited blank results.

Notes

Edit Blank

Carbon Old Blank 0.0000 New Blank 0.0012 Sulfur Old Blank 0.0000 New Blank 0.0010

Edit Blank

[1] Print

Page 204: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–36 CS230 Operation

Recalculate Results

• Recalculate results permits the operator to recalculate previous results based on a new calibration value.

• Operator must select the results to be recalculated when using option [2].

1. Press [3] Calibration from the main menu. The select results screen will be displayed.

2. Press the Next/Previous keys to move the cursor down and up the list of results.

3. Press Select to move the cursor up and include a sample.

A. Press Yes to include a sample. The included sample will be highlighted.

B. Press No to exclude a sample. The excluded sample will not be highlighted.

4. Press [8] Recalculate from the calibration menu to display the recalculate results menu.

Notes

Select Results

ID Code Carbon Sulfur A0000001 0.030 0.044 A0000002 0.033 0.051 A0000003 0.032 0.047 A0000004 0.033 0.050 A0000005 0.034 0.051 A0000006 0.030 0.046 >A0000007 0.031 0.045 0 Selected 1 of 7

Select Results ID Code Carbon

2 Selected 1 of 7

[1] Re-calc Today's [2] Re-calc Select

Page 205: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–37

5. Press [1] Re-calc Today’s to recalculate today’s results based on the recorded date corresponding to the results.

6. Press [2] Re-calc Select to recalculate the results that were previously selected.

7. Press Exit to recalculate the selected results and return to the main menu.

Page 206: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–38 CS230 Operation

Results Menu

• The results menu displays the list of analysis results.

• Through this procedure, analysis results can be transmitted to a data transmit peripheral, used to generate statistics, printed out, and/or deleted.

• The number of selected results will be displayed on the bottom line of each results screen.

1. To access the results screen, press [2] Results from the main menu. The results screen will appear.

2. Press the Next/Previous keys to move the cursor either down or up.

3. Press Select to move the cursor up and include a sample.

A. Press Yes to include a sample. The included sample will be highlighted.

B. Press No to exclude a sample. The excluded sample will not be highlighted.

Notes

Selected Results

ID Code Carbon Sulfur A0000001 0.030 0.044 A0000002 0.033 0.051 A0000003 0.032 0.047 A0000004 0.033 0.050 A0000005 0.034 0.051 A0000006 0.030 0.046 >A0000007 0.031 0.045 0 Selected 1 of 7

Page 207: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–39

4. Press the Menu key to display the results menu.

5. Press Exit to return to the results screen.

Select Results ID Code Carbon

[1] Record Format [2] List Format [3] Clear Selections [4] Delete [5] Statistics [6] Print [7] Transmit

Page 208: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–40 CS230 Operation

Results Format Selection

• The record format is the same as the select results screen that can display up to eleven results at a time.

• The list format displays one result at a time with more information provided per result.

1. Press [1] Record Format from the results menu to display the selected results in the record format. The record format is the same as the select results screen shown under step 1.

2. Press Menu to return to the select results screen.

3. Press [2] List Format to display the selected results in the list format. The list format screen will appear with the sample result indicated by an arrow on the record format screen.

Notes

Select Results

ID Code A0000001 Weight 0.1452 Method Name 1-Method Carbon Sulfur Result 0.8921 0.0322 Calib 0.7863 0.9309 Blank 0.00000 0.00000Time 40 44 Peak 16462 149 0 Selected 1 of 7

Page 209: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–41

Clear Selections

• Clear selections removes the highlight from selected results quickly giving the operator the opportunity to select other results.

1. With results selected on the select results screen, press the Menu key. The results menu will be displayed.

2. Press [3] Clear Selections to remove the highlight from all selected results. The select results screen will be displayed.

Note

Select Results ID Code Carbon

[1] Record Format [2] List Format [3] Clear Selections [4] Delete [5] Statistics [6] Print [7] Transmit

Page 210: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–42 CS230 Operation

Delete Selected Results

1. Press [4] Delete from the results menu to delete selected results. The delete results confirmation screen will appear.

2. Press Yes to delete the selected results and return to the results screen.

3. Press No to return to the results screen without deleting selected results.

Select Results ID Code Carbon

0 Selected 1 of 7

Confirmation

Delete Results

Yes/No

Page 211: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–43

Statistics

1. Press [5] Statistics from the results menu to calculate statistics based on selected results. The statistics screen will appear.

2. Press Menu to display the statistics menu.

3. Press [1] Print to receive a printout of the calculated statistics.

4. Press Exit to return to the statistics screen.

Statistics

Carbon Average 0.311 Std. Dev. 0.001 RSD 0.039 Points 3 Sulfur Average 0.0354 Std. Dev. 0.0003 RSD 0.73 Points 3

Statistics

[1] Print

Page 212: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–44 CS230 Operation

Definitions

Average—The average value of the selected results.

Standard Deviation—The amount of deviation, from the average value, where 67% of the measured results range. The standard deviation calculation uses “n-1" degrees of freedom.

Relative Standard Deviation—The standard deviation compared to the average value expressed as a percentage. (STD DEV/AVG) x 100.

Points—The number of selected results used to calculate the average value and standard deviation.

Page 213: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–45

Print Selected Results

Press [6] Print from the results menu to receive a printout on the system printer of the selected results. The select results screen will appear.

Select Results

ID Code Carbon Sulfur A0000001 0.030 0.044 A0000002 0.033 0.051 A0000003 0.032 0.047 A0000004 0.033 0.050 A0000005 0.034 0.051 A0000006 0.030 0.046 >A0000007 0.031 0.045 0 Selected 1 of 2

Page 214: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–46 CS230 Operation

Transmit Selected Results

Press [7] Transmit from the results menu to transmit selected results from the determinator to a peripheral device or computer. The select results screen will appear.

Select Results

ID Code Carbon Sulfur A0000001 0.030 0.044 A0000002 0.033 0.051 A0000003 0.032 0.047 A0000004 0.033 0.050 A0000005 0.034 0.051 A0000006 0.030 0.046 >A0000007 0.031 0.045 0 Selected 1 of 2

Page 215: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–47

Operation for Windows®

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 5–1.

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed on page 5–47.

Keypad Operation Contents:

Operation Guidelines...........................................................5–6 Before an Analysis .........................................................5–7 After an Analysis ...........................................................5–8 After Use......................................................................5–8

Crucibles...........................................................................5–9 Sample Preparation .......................................................... 5–10

Sample Size................................................................ 5–10 High Sulfur Samples .................................................... 5–10

Blank Samples ....................................................... 5–10 Analyze Menu .................................................................. 5–11

Screen Description....................................................... 5–11 Delete Weight ............................................................. 5–13 Insert Weight.............................................................. 5–14 Print Weights .............................................................. 5–15 System Controls.......................................................... 5–16

Definitions and Ranges ............................................ 5–17 Clean Switch............................................................... 5–18

With Autocleaner .................................................... 5–18 Without Autocleaner................................................ 5–19

Balance Weight ........................................................... 5–20 Transmit Last.............................................................. 5–21

Keypad

Windows®

Keypad

Page 216: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–48 CS230 Operation

Select Method ............................................................. 5–22 Sample Weight Entry ........................................................ 5–23 Sample Analysis ............................................................... 5–25 Calibrate Menu................................................................. 5–27

Calibration Results Format Selection............................... 5–28 Clear Selection............................................................ 5–29 Calculate Calibration .................................................... 5–30 Edit Calibration ........................................................... 5–32 Calculate Blank ........................................................... 5–33 Edit Blank................................................................... 5–35 Recalculate Results ...................................................... 5–36

Results Menu ................................................................... 5–38 Results Format Selection .............................................. 5–40 Clear Selections .......................................................... 5–41 Delete Selected Results ................................................ 5–42 Statistics .................................................................... 5–43

Definitions ............................................................. 5–44 Print Selected Results .................................................. 5–45 Transmit Selected Results............................................. 5–46

Operation for Windows® .................................................... 5–47 Windows Software Menus .................................................. 5–52

File Menu ................................................................... 5–52 Print ..................................................................... 5–52 Print Preview ......................................................... 5–52 Print Setup ............................................................ 5–52 Exit ...................................................................... 5–52

Edit Menu................................................................... 5–53 Insert ................................................................... 5–53 Fill........................................................................ 5–53 Cut....................................................................... 5–53 Copy..................................................................... 5–53 Paste .................................................................... 5–53

View Menu.................................................................. 5–54 Tool Bar ................................................................ 5–54 Status Bar ............................................................. 5–54 First Row............................................................... 5–54

Page 217: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–49

Analysis Row.......................................................... 5–54 Last Row ............................................................... 5–54

Samples Menu ............................................................ 5–55 Login .................................................................... 5–55 Balance................................................................. 5–55 Analyze................................................................. 5–55 Abort .................................................................... 5–55 Pause ................................................................... 5–56 Queued Samples .................................................... 5–56 Promote ................................................................ 5–56 Promote: Analyze Next............................................ 5–56 Demote................................................................. 5–56 Recalculate ............................................................ 5–56 Transmit ............................................................... 5–56 Text Import Data.................................................... 5–56 Text Export Data .................................................... 5–57 Text Export Buffers ................................................. 5–57 Delete................................................................... 5–57

Configuration Menu...................................................... 5–58 Calibrations ........................................................... 5–58 Blank.................................................................... 5–58 Drift ..................................................................... 5–58 Linearizations......................................................... 5–59 Standards.............................................................. 5–59 Methods ................................................................ 5–59 Counters ............................................................... 5–59 Sample Templates .................................................. 5–59 User Defined Fields ................................................. 5–59 System ................................................................. 5–59 Users.................................................................... 5–60 Transmission Formats ............................................. 5–60 Select Language..................................................... 5–60 Auto Widths........................................................... 5–60 Display.................................................................. 5–60 Sample filters......................................................... 5–60 Hardware Calibrations ............................................. 5–60

Page 218: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–50 CS230 Operation

Diagnostics Menu ........................................................ 5–61 Leak Check............................................................ 5–61 Ambients............................................................... 5–61 Switches ............................................................... 5–61 Solenoids .............................................................. 5–61 Comport................................................................ 5–61

Maintenance Menu....................................................... 5–62 Login .................................................................... 5–62 View Log File.......................................................... 5–62

Login a Sample ................................................................ 5–63 Sample Login Definitions .............................................. 5–65 Balance Login ............................................................. 5–66 Login using a Sample Template ..................................... 5–67

Analyze a Sample............................................................. 5–68 Pause / Delay Analysis ...................................................... 5–69

Remove a Programmed Pause or Delay........................... 5–70 Delete a Sample............................................................... 5–71 Print Sample Results ......................................................... 5–72 Transmit ......................................................................... 5–74 Recalculate Result ............................................................ 5–75 Calibration....................................................................... 5–76

Blank Calibration ......................................................... 5–76 Standard Calibration .................................................... 5–76 Drift Correction ........................................................... 5–76

Blank Calibration .............................................................. 5–77 Standard Calibration ......................................................... 5–78

Standard Calibration Definitions................................ 5–80 Drift Correction ................................................................ 5–81

Drift Correction ........................................................... 5–82 Data Management ............................................................ 5–83

Insert Data into the Spreadsheet ................................... 5–83 Insert a Sample Out-of-Sequence .................................. 5–84 Fill Selected Cells with the Same Values.......................... 5–84 Select First Row in the Spreadsheet ............................... 5–85 Select the Analysis Row in the Spreadsheet..................... 5–85 Select Last Row in the Spreadsheet................................ 5–85

Page 219: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–51

Export Data ..................................................................... 5–86 Export Configuration .................................................... 5–86

Filename ............................................................... 5–86 Export Definitions .............................................. 5–87

Fields.................................................................... 5–88 Delimiters.............................................................. 5–89 Automation............................................................ 5–90 Advanced .............................................................. 5–91 Preview................................................................. 5–92

Text Export Data ......................................................... 5–93 Export Text Buffers...................................................... 5–94

Import Data .................................................................... 5–95 Transmit Selected Samples ................................................ 5–96 Clipboard Use .................................................................. 5–97

Cut Data to the Clipboard ............................................. 5–97 Copy Data to the Clipboard ........................................... 5–97 Paste Data from the Clipboard....................................... 5–97

Configure Result Plot......................................................... 5–98 Display the Menu......................................................... 5–98

Selection Procedures............................................... 5–98

Page 220: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–52 CS230 Operation

Windows Software Menus

• The information that follows is a list of all the Menus available from the CS230 Windows Software. The menus appear at the top of the screen and drop down when clicked.

File Menu

This menu permits the operator to configure and print data on the system printer, import data from another application software and export data to a floppy disk.

Click File to display this menu.

Print

Select Print to access the report settings dialog box and print selected sample results on the system printer. Refer to Print Sample Results on page 5–72.

Print Preview

Select Print Preview to access the report settings dialog box and preview how selected samples would print on the system printer. Refer to Configure the Analysis Report on page 4–48.

Print Setup

Select Print Setup to access the printer setup dialog box and configure the system printer settings.

Exit

Select Exit to stop using the CS230 application program and return to the Windows Operating System.

Note

Page 221: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–53

Edit Menu

This menu permits the operator to insert a sample out of sequence into the spreadsheet, fill a group of cells in the spreadsheet with the same data, cut and move data to other cells, copy data to other cells and paste data to other cells.

Click Edit to display this menu.

Insert

Select Insert to insert a sample out of sequence, between unanalyzed samples, into the spreadsheet for analysis. Refer to Data Management on page 5–83.

Fill

Select Fill to quickly fill a group of cells in the spreadsheet with the same data value. Refer to Data Management on page 5–83.

Cut

Select Cut to move data from an entire row in the spreadsheet to the clipboard. Refer to Clipboard Use on page 5–97.

Copy

Select Copy to transfer data from an entire row in the spreadsheet to the clipboard. Refer to Clipboard Use on page 5–97.

Paste

Select Paste to insert data from the clipboard to a selected row in the spreadsheet. Refer to Clipboard Use on page 5–97.

Page 222: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–54 CS230 Operation

View Menu

This menu permits the operator to turn the tool bar and status bar ON or OFF and select the first row, last row or analysis row in the spreadsheet.

Click View to display this menu.

Tool Bar

Select Tool Bar to display or hide the toolbar. Refer to Configure the Screen on page 4–50.

Status Bar

Select Status Bar to display or hide the status Bar. Refer to Configure the Screen on page 4–50.

First Row

Select the First Row of analysis data in the spreadsheet. Refer to Data Management on page 5–83.

Analysis Row

Select the Analysis Row that contains the next sample to be analyzed in the spreadsheet. Refer to Data Management on page 5–83.

Last Row

Select the Last Row of analysis data in the spreadsheet. Refer to Data Management on page 5–83.

Page 223: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–55

Samples Menu

This menu permits the operator to log sample data into the spreadsheet, analyze a sample, abort an analysis, recalculate results, transmit results and delete a sample from the spreadsheet.

Click Samples to display this menu.

Login

Select Login to enter a sample and sample data into the spreadsheet. Refer to Login a Sample on page 5–63.

Balance

Select Balance to enter a mass from the balance into the sample login screen. Refer to Balance Login on page 5–66.

Analyze

Select Analyze to login and analyze a sample or analyze a standard. Refer to Analyze a Sample on page 5–68.

Abort

Select Abort to stop an analysis in progress. Refer to Analyze a Sample on page 5–68.

Page 224: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–56 CS230 Operation

Pause

The operator can stop or pause analysis at a selected sample and then resume at a programmed date and time. Refer to Delay Analysis, page 5–69, for additional information.

Queued Samples

This selection only appears when the quick loader is installed and is used to select how many samples are in the quick loader queue and which pedestals have a crucible and sample set on them. For more information refer to page 3–13.

Promote

Moves an unanalyzed sample, within the sample list, up the list towards the next sample to be analyzed.

Promote: Analyze Next

Moves an unanalyzed sample, within the sample list, up the list and positions it as the next sample to be analyzed.

Demote

Moves an unanalyzed sample, within the sample list, down the list towards the last sample to be analyzed.

Recalculate

After an analysis is complete, Recalculate Results can be used to recalculate the result if the extraction data or calibration has changed. Refer to Calculate a Result on page 5–75.

Transmit

Select Transmit to transfer selected sample results to a host computer. Refer to Transmit on page 5–74.

Text Import Data

Used to import sample data from another software application. Refer to Import Data, page 5–95, for additional information.

Page 225: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–57

Text Export Data

Used to export sample data to another storage location like a floppy disk. Refer to Text Export Data, page 5–93, for additional information.

Text Export Buffers

Used to export selected sample plot data to a file or another application. Refer to Export Text Buffers, page 5–94, for additional information.

Delete

Select Delete to remove a selected sample from the spreadsheet. Refer to Delete a Sample on page 5–71.

Page 226: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–58 CS230 Operation

Configuration Menu

This menu is used for instrument calibration, to configure the instrument hardware, to create a method, to configure the software and for maintenance configuration.

Click Configuration to display this menu.

Calibrations

Select Calibrations to set the accuracy of the instrument to that of known calibration standard samples. Refer to Calibration on page 5–76.

Blank

Select Blank to calculate the system blank and compensate for it when calculating the analysis result. Refer to page 5–77, Blank Calibration.

Drift

Select Drift to compensate standard calibration and account for variances or Drift in the instrument hardware that can slightly change the calibration. Refer to Drift Correction on page 5–81.

Page 227: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–59

Linearizations

Select Linearizations to enter the IR cell reference and saturation values. Breaks and slopes are not typically set, they are provided for those who wish to modify the linearity of the instrument. Refer to Linearization on page 10–32.

Standards

Select Standards to create a list of standard calibration samples. Refer to Standards on page 4–57.

Methods

Select Method to create a set of analysis parameter values for analysis. Refer to Method Development on page 4–53.

Counters

Select Counters to automatically determine when periodic maintenance is necessary. Maintenance data that was entered into Login Periodic Maintenance is used by the counters to determine when maintenance is necessary. Refer to Login Periodic Maintenance on page 6–24.

Sample Templates

Sample Templates is a quick way for the operator to login a sample and enter a method, comment and description. Select Sample Template to develop a specific sample template. After a sample template is developed, use Login Using a Sample Template to login a sample with predetermined sample analysis data. Refer to Sample Templates on page 4–56.

User Defined Fields

Permits the operator to add a unique field to the spreadsheet and sample login screen. The field can include a formula for calculation or contain only text. Refer to User Defined Fields, page 4–81, for additional information.

System

Select System Configuration to set the overall instrument operating settings and configure the instrument for a specific application or set of applications. Refer to System Configuration on page 4–59.

Page 228: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–60 CS230 Operation

Users

Select Assign User Functions to grant permissions that a user can use while operating the instrument. Refer to Users on page 4–74.

Transmission Formats

Before data can be transmitted to a host computer, the transmitted data format must be configured to match. Use Transmission Formats to Configure Data Transmission. Refer to Transmission Formats on page 4–64.

Select Language

Select Language to determine and change the language of text display by the software. Refer to Select Language on page 4–73.

Auto Widths

Select Auto Widths to automatically adjust the width of each cell to fit the text. Refer to Configure the Spreadsheet on page 4–51.

Display

Select Display to set the desktop characteristics as viewed on the computer monitor. Refer to Configure the Spreadsheet on page 4–51.

Sample filters

Sample filters permits the operator to display sample data based on a predefined requirement. Refer to Sample Filters on page 4–77.

Hardware Calibrations

Hardware Calibration permits the operator and service person to calibrate the Back Pressure Controller, Catalyst Heaters, and Oxygen Flow Rate. Refer to Hardware Calibrations starting on page 10–3.

Page 229: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–61

Diagnostics Menu

This menu is used to perform a leak check, monitor the instrument operating parameters, toggle the solenoid valves, monitor the electrical switch states and check communications between the instrument and PC.

Click Diagnostics to display this menu.

Leak Check

Select Leak Check to check and determine if the instrument has an oxygen or pneumatic gas leak. Refer to Leak Check on page 8–19.

Ambients

Select Ambients to monitor the system operating parameters and display the ambient monitor. All parameters can be displayed. Refer to Ambient Monitor on page 8–22.

Switches

Select Switches to view the electrical switch states. None of the states can be changed from this screen. Refer to Switches on page 8–26.

Solenoids

Select Solenoids to toggle the solenoid valves to check operation, diagnose instrument problems and perform periodic maintenance. Refer to Solenoids on page 8–27.

Comport

Select Comport to check the transfer of data between the PC and the instrument. Refer to Comport on page 8–28.

Page 230: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–62 CS230 Operation

Maintenance Menu

This menu permits the operator to login periodic maintenance and view the maintenance log file.

Click Maintenance to display this menu.

Login

Select Login to login periodic maintenance after it was performed. Refer to Login Periodic Maintenance on page 6–24.

View Log File

The system will automatically keep a record of various procedures that were performed and error conditions. The record can be viewed using View Log File. Refer to View Log File on page 6–25.

Page 231: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–63

Login a Sample

Login a Sample is used by the operator to enter sample information into the spreadsheet. This procedure is called Sample Login. Using Sample Login the operator can login a Blank Sample, Standard Sample, Gas Dose Sample or an Unknown Sample for analysis.

Before a sample is analyzed, the sample type and information associated with it must be entered into the spreadsheet. A sample that has been logged in may be analyzed later.

In addition to Sample Login, a sample can be logged in using Balance Login, page 5–66, Login Using a Sample Template, page 5–67, or directly into the Spreadsheet by clicking on the next available line and typing in the sample data. The sample name and method can be inserted using the drop-down menu.

Page 232: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–64 CS230 Operation

1. Click Samples and select Login. The Sample Login screen will appear.

2. Enter the information required in the dialog box. Refer to Sample Login Definitions on page 5–65. The sample type should be entered for the sample ID.

3. To enter the mass, with an interfaced balance, it is only necessary to click Balance, the mass will be entered automatically.

4. After entering all the necessary information, click OK to login the sample.

Page 233: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–65

Sample Login Definitions

Sample Name—The name or type of sample. Enter the sample type that is being analyzed so the proper sample type will appear in the spreadsheet.

Mass—The weight of the sample. If blanks or gas doses are analyzed 1.000 gram is automatically entered as the sample weight. For standards and unknown samples enter the mass of the sample.

Method—The method used for analysis. Click the Down Arrow to select from the list of methods.

Comments—A statement used to explain an operation or procedure. This is an optional entry.

Description—A statement used to describe the type of operation or procedure. This is an optional entry.

Operator—The name of the operator logging the samples. This is an optional entry.

Add to End of List—Login the sample and add it to the end of the list in the spreadsheet.

Add as Next Sample to Run—Login the sample and insert it into the sample list after the last sample that was analyzed.

Keep logging samples until cancel is pressed—Check this box to log consecutive samples. The login screen will appear again after OK is clicked. Click Cancel to exit the login screen.

Page 234: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–66 CS230 Operation

Balance Login

Balance automatically enters a row at the spreadsheet. The sample ID and method will be entered into the row along with the mass. The sample ID and method will be the same as those in the previous row. The mass will be the value read on the balance.

Before the mass can be automatically transferred to the spreadsheet, the balance must be interfaced with the instrument. Refer to Balance on page 3–3 for instructions.

1. Click the Samples menu and select Balance. A row will be entered at the bottom of the spreadsheet and the mass displayed on the balance will be automatically entered into the row. The function key F4 can also be pressed or Balance can be selected from the toolbar.

Page 235: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–67

Login using a Sample Template

1. Click the Samples menu and select Login. The Login screen will appear.

2. Click the drop down arrow to the right of sample name and enter the desired sample name from the drop down list. The sample name, mass, method, comments, description, operator will automatically be entered into the spreadsheet.

3. Continue with sample login and enter the other necessary information. Refer to Sample Login Definitions on page 5–65 for more information.

Page 236: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–68 CS230 Operation

Analyze a Sample

After a sample is logged in it can be analyzed. Analyze a Sample starts an analysis. Analysis will start with the first unanalyzed sample in the spreadsheet. Analyzing will appear in the date column as the analysis is in progress.

Abort an Analysis will stop an analysis in progress.

• Before a Sample can be analyzed it must be logged in. To log in a sample refer to Login a Sample on page 5–63.

SERIOUS BURNS After analysis use crucible tongs to remove the hot crucibles from the pedestal and place them in the crucible bucket to cool.

1. Press the Loader Button to open the furnace. Place the crucible and sample on the pedestal. Press the Loader Button again to start analysis.

Alternative: After the crucible is on the pedestal you can click the Samples menu and select Analyze to start analysis. The function key F5 can also be pressed or Analyze can be selected from the toolbar.

• If you initiate analysis from the Windows® software the piston will not drop down and open.

• If you initiate analysis by pressing the loader button the piston will drop down and open permitting the operator to add a sample and insert a new crucible.

2. If it is necessary to stop an analysis click the Samples menu and select Abort. The function key F6 can also be pressed or Abort can be selected from the toolbar. The analysis in progress will stop and Aborted will appear in the date column.

• If the furnace did not start before abort was selected the analysis will be reset and can be restarted. “Reset” in the data column if that sample can be re-run.

Note

Note

Notes

WARNING

Page 237: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–69

Pause / Delay Analysis

Delayed Analysis permits the operator to start an analysis at a later date and time. If can also be used to start or stop an autoloader sequence.

• An analysis method should be developed before a sample is logged in. Refer to Method Development on page 4–53.

1. Determine where in the sample list to pause or delay analysis and select the sample. The sample must be an analyzed sample.

2. From the Samples menu click Pause or press F11. The Pause/Delay Start dialog box will appear.

3. In the highlighted field, enter the date and time to start the delayed analysis. The date and time that appears may be edited. The format for entering the date and time is [05/01/2000 4:30:00 PM]. A space should be inserted after the date and time or select Manually if pausing for operator intervention.

4. Click OK to start the delayed analysis. A clock symbol will appear in the spreadsheet next to the sample that will be analyzed at the programmed delayed start time or if Manually was selected a red octagon will appear in the spreadsheet. The analysis will begin only when the operator clicks analyze.

Note

Page 238: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–70 CS230 Operation

Remove a Programmed Pause or Delay

1. In the spreadsheet click the pause symbol to highlight the row.

2. From the Samples menu click Pause. The Pause dialog box will appear.

3. In the Pause dialog box click Clear. The programmed pause or delay will be removed and the symbol will disappear.

4. Click Analyze F5 to start a manually paused analysis.

Page 239: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–71

Delete a Sample

A sample that has been logged in or analyzed can be deleted from the spreadsheet. This may be a sample that was logged in error or a sample that was improperly analyzed.

1. Select the sample or samples in the spreadsheet to delete by clicking on them. To select more than one sample hold the control key down and click the samples.

2. Click Samples and select Delete. The selected samples will be deleted from the spreadsheet.

Page 240: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–72 CS230 Operation

Print Sample Results

Print Sample Results can be used to print sample and analysis data can be printed on the system printer.

• To print a report with the fields displayed in the spreadsheet do not select Define Report Fields.

1. If necessary, configure the printed report before printing sample results. Refer to Configure the Analysis Report on page 4–48.

2. From the analysis screen, select the desired samples with analysis data to print on the system printer.

3. Click File and select Print. The Report Settings screen will appear.

Note

Page 241: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–73

4. Click OK. The Print screen will appear.

5. Configure the printer as necessary and click OK. The selected samples will be printed on the system printer.

Page 242: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–74 CS230 Operation

Transmit

Analysis Results can be transmitted or transferred to a host computer. This permits another person to analyze data as samples are being analyzed. It can also be used to save selected results at another location.

1. Select the sample or samples in the spreadsheet to transmit by clicking on them. To select more than one sample hold the control key down and click the samples.

2. Click Samples and select Transmit. The selected samples will be transmitted to the host computer.

Page 243: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–75

Recalculate Result

After a sample is analyzed, the result can be recalculated if sample data has changed. The mass, method or calibration may have changed, or need to be changed, to obtain the desired result.

1. Select the sample or samples in the spreadsheet to recalculate by clicking on them. To select more than one sample hold the control key down and click the samples.

2. Click Samples and select Recalculate. The selected samples will be recalculated using the new mass, method or calibration data. The new result will appear in the spreadsheet.

Page 244: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–76 CS230 Operation

Calibration

Calibration is the process that adjusts the instrument to produce an analysis result to equal that of a known calibration standard with the same concentration. First a Blank Calibration is performed, then Standard Calibration and then as daily maintenance both a Blank Calibration and Drift Correction.

Single point calibration calibrates the instrument to one calibration point. Multi-point calibration calibrates the instrument to a set of calibration points over an expected range of concentrations.

Blank Calibration

Blank Calibration is used to calculate the system blank or baseline. Sometimes this is called the blank area. Blank calibration calculates the system blank and compensates for it when calculating the analysis result. The system blank should be determined every day by performing a blank calibration before analysis. Refer to Blank Calibration on page 5–77.

Standard Calibration

Standard Calibration is used to calibrate the instrument with known calibration standards. A single point or multi-point calibration can be performed and the curve type selected although, LECO recommends multipoint, linear calibrations that employ 1/certified weighting. Additionally a blank calibration should be completed prior to performing a standard calibration. Since Standard Calibration is saved with each method, each method must be calibrated after it is created. Refer to Standard Calibration on page 5–78.

Drift Correction

Drift Correction is used to compensate standard calibration and account for variances in the instrument hardware that can slightly change the calibration. Drift correction should be performed at the start of every day. This insures accurate calibration and analysis results. Refer to Drift Correction on page 5–81.

Page 245: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–77

Blank Calibration

Blank calibration calculates the system blank and compensates for it when calculating the analysis result. Refer to Calibration on page 5–76 for more information.

1. Login and perform at least three blank analyses.

2. Select the results of the blank analyses from the spreadsheet.

3. Click Configuration and select Blank. The Element Selection screen will appear.

• In the screen below, the software displays the data in blue to alert the operator that the data has changed.

• Step 4 can only be performed if more than one element is shown in the dialog box.

4. Include or exclude an element by clicking a row to select the element and clicking Include/Exclude. The action box will indicate if the element is included or excluded. If the element is included a blank calculation will be calculated for that element.

5. Click OK to calculate the system blank based on the analysis results obtained in step one.

Note

Note

Page 246: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–78 CS230 Operation

Standard Calibration

Standard Calibration is used to calibrate the instrument with known calibration standards. Refer to Calibration on page 5–76 for more information.

• Refer to Standard Calibration Definitions on page 5–80 when performing this procedure.

• The instrument blank should be calibrated before performing standard calibration.

• LECO recommends that multipoint linear calibration that employs 1/certified weighting be used for standard calibration.

• Gas Dose analysis is very similar to standard calibration. The gas dose (loop) value, based on 100% CO2 (carbon only), is entered at the factory into the standards database on the instrument under the name “Gas Dose”.

1. Login and perform at least three standard analyses.

2. Select the results of the standard analyses from the spreadsheet.

3. Click Configuration and select Calibrations.

Notes

Page 247: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–79

4. Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select a Cell (detector) to calculate a calibration for. A separate calibration can be calculated for each cell.

5. Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select a Curve Type. LECO recommends that multipoint linear calibration that employs 1/certified weighting be used for standard calibration.

6. View the curve displayed on the graph. It should intersect the black squares, which represent the standards. If you’re using multipoint calibration zoom in on each standard for the most accurate viewing.

7. Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select the desired Weighting. LECO recommends that multipoint linear calibration that employs 1/certified weighting be used for standard calibration.

8. Click OK to select the cell to calibrate. One or more cells can be selected.

9. Click Print to print a copy of the calculated calibration on the system printer.

10. Repeat the process for each cell, carbon high, carbon low, and sulfur.

11. Click OK to exit the calibration procedure and save the calibration curve.

Page 248: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–80 CS230 Operation

Standard Calibration Definitions

Cell Type—Selects the measurement cell that will be associated with the calibration curve. The calculated calibration will be applied to this cell. A different calibration can be calculated and applied to each cell.

Curve Type—Selects the type of calibration curve. Select a curve that intersects each calibration result. LECO recommends that multipoint linear calibration that employs 1/certified weighting be used for standard calibration.

Weighting—Determines which calibration results, on the calibration curve, get priority. LECO recommends that multipoint linear calibration that employs 1/certified weighting be used for standard calibration.

• Normal—Each point gets equal priority.

• Manual—A manual weighting can be entered.

• 1/Certified—A weighting factor that can be applied to the calibration data points. This will counteract a bias for higher concentrations that develops naturally from the curve fitting routines.

Show—Click Show to show the last calibration. The last calibration will appear on the graph in blue.

Manual—Click Manual to enter a new calibration equation. This can be done if a calibration was lost and a previous calibration recorded.

RMS Error (Root Mean Square)—A method of quantifying the dispersion or spread of data. It is used in the PC software to determine which calibration curve is a better fit. The lower the RMS error the better the fit.

Zoom In—Draw a box around a calibration point to zoom in.

Zoom Out—Click on a calibration point with the right mouse button. A Zoom Out button will appear. Click the Zoom Out button to zoom out.

Page 249: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–81

Drift Correction

Drift Correction is used to compensate standard calibration and account for variances in the instrument hardware over a period of time that can slightly change the calibration. Drift correction should be performed at the start of each day. This insures accurate calibration and analysis results.

Perform standard calibration and choose the drift standards before performing a drift calibration. Refer to Calibration on page 5–76 for more information.

• A Blank Calibration should be performed before every Drift Correction. Refer to Blank Calibration on page 5–77.

Note

Page 250: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–82 CS230 Operation

Drift Correction

1. Login and perform a standard analysis.

2. Select the result of the standard analysis from the spreadsheet.

3. Click Configuration and select Drift the drift correction screen will appear.

• In the screen below, the software displays the data in blue to alert the operator that the data has changed.

• Step 4 can only be performed if more than one element is shown in the dialog box.

4. Include or exclude an element by clicking a row to select the element and clicking Include/Exclude. The action box will indicate if the element is included or excluded. If the element is included a drift calculation will be calculated for that element.

5. Click OK to calculate the drift based on the analysis result obtained in step one.

Note

Note

Page 251: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–83

Data Management

Data Management is a group of procedures that permits the operator to move sample data from one area of the spreadsheet to another, move data into the spreadsheet and move data out of the spreadsheet and store it on a floppy disk. The following procedures are grouped under Data Management.

• Insert Data into the Spreadsheet

• Insert a Sample out-of-Sequence

• Fill Selected Cells with the Same Values

• Select First Row in the Spreadsheet

• Select the Analysis Row in the Spreadsheet

• Import Sample Data

• Export Sample Data

Insert Data into the Spreadsheet

A group of cells, in the spreadsheet, can be quickly filled with the same data. As an example, the method could be changed in a group of logged in unanalyzed samples.

1. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the cells to fill with the same data.

2. Click Edit and select Fill.

3. Enter the data to fill into each selected cell.

4. Click OK to insert the data into the selected cells.

Page 252: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–84 CS230 Operation

Insert a Sample Out-of-Sequence

To insert a sample into the spreadsheet, out of sequence and between unanalyzed samples, Insert should be used.

1. Click and select a row in the spreadsheet after the last analyzed sample. (Insert will insert a row before the selected row.)

2. Click Edit and select Insert. A row will be inserted into the spreadsheet before the selected row.

• You can also insert a sample out-of-sequence from the Login screen. Click on a row next to the position where you want to insert the sample and then select Login F3. Click the insert position button at the bottom of the screen.

Fill Selected Cells with the Same Values

1. Select the spreadsheet cells to fill with the same data values.

2. Click Edit and select Fill. The Fill screen will appear.

3. Enter the desired values in the dialog box on the fill screen.

4. Click OK to fill each of the selected cells with the desired values.

Note

Page 253: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–85

Select First Row in the Spreadsheet

Using this procedure the first row in the spreadsheet can be quickly selected.

1. Click View and select First row.

Select the Analysis Row in the Spreadsheet

Using this procedure the analysis row in the spreadsheet can be quickly selected. The analysis row is the row that contains the next sample to be analyzed.

1. Click View and select Analysis row.

Select Last Row in the Spreadsheet

Using this procedure the Last row in the spreadsheet can be quickly selected.

1. Click View and select Last row.

Page 254: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–86 CS230 Operation

Export Data

• Before sample data can be exported an export format must be configured.

• Multiple export formats can be configured.

Export Configuration

Filename

1. Select the Configuration menu and click Text Export Formats. The Export Format Screen will appear.

2. To move a selected Export Format up towards the top of the list select it and click Promote.

3. To move the selected Export Format down towards the bottom of the list select it and click Demote.

4. Select Ascending to list the Export Format in ascending alphabetical order.

5. Select Descending to list the Export Format in descending alphabetical order.

Notes

Page 255: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–87

6. Click Properties to configure the text export format. The Filename screen will appear.

7. Enter a filename for the exported file or click browse and search for a file name.

8. Click Append to File, Automatically increment Filename or Prompt for Filename as desired. Refer to Export Definitions below.

9. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

10. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Export Definitions

Append to File—When selected, the highlighted sample analysis data will be attached to the previously saved file.

Automatically Increment Filename—If the filename contains numbers, they will automatically be incremented by one when the file is saved.

Prompt for Filename—When selected, the export filename screen will appear when exporting a file, prompting the operator to enter a filename.

Page 256: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–88 CS230 Operation

Fields

1. Click the Fields tab. The Fields Format Screen will appear. Select the desired fields to export in the file.

2. To Add an invisible field select the field and click Add.

3. To Remove a visible field select the field and click Remove.

4. To move a selected field up towards the top of the list, click Promote.

5. To move the selected field down towards the bottom of the list, click Demote.

6. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

7. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Page 257: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–89

Delimiters

1. Click the Delimiters tab. The Delimiters Format Screen will appear. Select the desired delimiters to export in the file.

2. Click XML to export the text data in XML format. If XML is selected no other parameters in the screen can be configured.

3. Click Column Header to transmit the column header.

4. Select or enter the Field, Start of Transmission, and End of Line delimiters.

5. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

6. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Page 258: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–90 CS230 Operation

Automation

1. Click the Automation tab. The Automation Format Screen will appear.

2. Select Automatically export each new analysis to automatically export the analysis data after every analysis.

3. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

4. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Page 259: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–91

Advanced

1. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Format Screen will appear.

2. Position the cursor in the Export Format and click the mouse to place the cursor at the point in the format to edit a field.

3. Select a Field from the Fields box and click Add Field to Export Format to add a field.

4. Highlight a Field in the Export Format and then press Delete on the keyboard to delete it.

5. Click OK to save the changes and exit.

6. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Page 260: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–92 CS230 Operation

Preview

1. Click the Preview tab. The Preview Export Format Screen will appear and display how selected samples would be exported with the current settings.

• This is a status screen to view the export data format. The export format cannot be changed from this screen.

2. Click OK or Cancel to exit.

Note

Page 261: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–93

Text Export Data

Text Export Data permits the operator to select sample data and export that data to a file. Sample data can be inserted into an Excel® spreadsheet from the exported file.

1. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the rows with sample data to export to a file.

• If no sample is selected only the last sample in the spreadsheet will be exported and saved.

2. Click the Sample menu and select Text Export Data. The Export Format selection screen will appear.

• The format selection screen will not appear unless there is more than one format selected.

Note

Note

Page 262: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–94 CS230 Operation

3. Select the Export Format and click OK. The Export Filename selection screen will appear.

4. Enter a Filename and File Type.

5. Click Save to export and save the file.

Export Text Buffers

Text Export Buffers permits the operator to select sample plot data and export that data to a file. Sample plot data can be inserted into an Excel® spreadsheet from the exported file.

1. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the rows with sample data to export to a file.

• If no sample is selected only the last sample in the spreadsheet will be exported and saved.

2. Click the Sample menu and select Text Export Buffers. The Export Buffers Filename selection screen will appear.

• File extensions of (.txt) or (.csv) are good choices to insert the saved files into an Excel® spreadsheet.

3. Enter a filename and extension. Click Save to export and save the file.

Note

Note

Page 263: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–95

Import Data

Text Import Data permits the operator to import sample data from another application such as an Excel® spreadsheet.

1. Click the Sample menu and select Text Import Data. The Import File selection screen will appear.

2. Select the file to import.

3. Click Open to import the file.

Page 264: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–96 CS230 Operation

Transmit Selected Samples

Transmit Data permits the operator to select sample data and transmit the data to a peripheral device. Sample data can be transmitted from a serial port or over a network.

• Before data is transmitted a transmission data format must be defined. Refer to Transmit Data Configuration on page 4–64.

1. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the rows with sample data to transmit.

• If no sample is selected only the last sample in the spreadsheet will be transmitted.

2. Click the Sample menu and select Transmit. The Transmission Format selection screen will appear.

• The transmission format selection screen will not appear unless there is more than one format selected.

3. Select the Transmission Format and click OK to transmit the selected sample data. Click Cancel to exit without transmitting any data.

Note

Note

Note

Page 265: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–97

Clipboard Use

The Clipboard is a temporary storage space for data. Data can be moved into and out of the clipboard by cutting, copying or pasting. By using the clipboard cell data can be moved throughout the spreadsheet.

Cut Data to the Clipboard

• Cut is used to remove data from an entire row in the spreadsheet to the clipboard. Once on the clipboard it can be pasted into another location.

1. Select the row of data in the spreadsheet to cut.

2. Click the Edit menu and select Cut. The data will be removed from the spreadsheet and moved to the clipboard.

Copy Data to the Clipboard

• Copy is used to duplicate data from an entire row in the spreadsheet to the clipboard. Once on the clipboard it can be pasted into another location.

1. Select the row of data in the spreadsheet to copy.

2. Click the Edit menu and select Copy. The data will be copied from the spreadsheet to the clipboard.

Paste Data from the Clipboard

• Paste is used to paste data from the clipboard to a selected row in the spreadsheet.

1. Select an empty row in the spreadsheet to insert analysis data that has been moved to the clipboard.

2. Click the Edit menu and select Paste. The data will be moved from the clipboard to the spreadsheet.

Note

Note

Note

Page 266: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–98 CS230 Operation

Configure Result Plot

The CS230 Windows Software permits the operator to configure the result plot to show the desired result information on the plot as determined by the operator. The Configure Result Plot menu give the operator the choice of zooming out, zooming out one level, labeling plotted points, plotting the statistical points, and selecting an auto independent scale. Plot properties can also be selected from this menu.

Display the Menu

1. To display the Configure Result Plot menu, move the mouse pointer to the result plot and right click on the plot. The Configure Result Plot menu will appear.

2. Click on the menu selection to select or deselect it. A check indicates the item has been selected.

3. When finished, click on the plot to remove the menu.

Selection Procedures

Zoom In (not a menu selection)—Position the pointer (mouse pointer) over the area to zoom in on. Hold the left mouse button down and draw a box. The area inside the box will be magnified. Draw another box to zoom in farther. Zoom In cannot be used if the sample being analyzed is displayed. Wait until analysis is complete and then zoom in on the plot.

Zoom Out—Click Zoom Out to remove all steps of magnification.

Zoom Out One Level—Click Zoom Out to remove the last step of magnification.

Label Points—When result points are selected and displayed, the points can be numbered to show their relationship to the samples selected. The first sample selected is labeled number 1 and the remaining samples selected are numbered as they were selected from the spreadsheet. The number displayed on the plot is not the sample number displayed on the spreadsheet. Multiple samples and statistics (below) must be selected before this feature can be used.

Page 267: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Operation CS230 5–99

Statistics—Changes the plotted result curves to plotted result points. A point is shown for each sample and represents the peak concentration. Multiple samples must be selected before result points can be plotted.

Auto Independent Scale—If multiple plots are displayed they will be scaled the same. This means if one plot is many times larger than one of the other plots the smaller plot may be hard to see or not seen at all. By selecting auto independent scale, all plots will be made the same height in order to compare one plot to another.

Properties—Click Properties to display the Plot Properties Configuration screen.

From the Properties screen you can select the Reporting Units, Significant Digits, Plot Pattern and Plot Color. You can also Hide the Baseline and Plot if desired.

Page 268: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

5–100 CS230 Operation

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 269: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–1

6 6 Maintenance

Illustrations .......................................................................6–2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule .............................................6–3 Anhydrone Tube.................................................................6–4

Removal.......................................................................6–4 Packing........................................................................6–4

Autocleaner .......................................................................6–6 Autocleaner Assembly ....................................................6–7 Autocleaner Mesh Filter ..................................................6–9 Autocleaner O-rings ..................................................... 6–10

Catalyst Heater Tube Packing............................................. 6–11 Cellulose Filter ................................................................. 6–13

Removal..................................................................... 6–13 Packing...................................................................... 6–13

Combustion Tube ............................................................. 6–15 Combustion Zone O-rings .................................................. 6–16 Incoming Reagent Tube..................................................... 6–17

Removal..................................................................... 6–17 Packing...................................................................... 6–17

Lance and Filter Assembly ................................................. 6–19 Pinch Valve Tubing ........................................................... 6–21 Reagent Tube Screen Filter ................................................ 6–23 Login Periodic Maintenance ................................................ 6–24 View Log File ................................................................... 6–25 Reset Maintenance Counters .............................................. 6–26

Maintenance

Page 270: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–2 CS230 Maintenance

Illustrations

Figure 6-1 ......... Anhydrone Tube ........................................ 6–5 Figure 6-2 ......... Autocleaner Assembly ................................ 6–8 Figure 6-3 ......... Catalyst Heater Tube Packing ...................... 6–12 Figure 6-4 ......... Cellulose Filter Packing ............................... 6–14 Figure 6-5 ......... Reagent Tube Removal............................... 6–18 Figure 6-6 ......... Reagent Tube Packing ................................ 6–18 Figure 6-7 ......... Lance and Filter Assembly........................... 6–20 Figure 6-8 ......... Pinch Valve Assembly ................................. 6–22

Page 271: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–3

Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Equipment/Material Replacement/Cleaning

Schedule Inspection Schedule

Anhydrone Tube When anhydrone cakes. Refer to page 6–4.

Inspect daily. Replace as needed.

Autocleaner Daily. Refer to page 6–6.

Disassemble and clean daily.

Autocleaner Mesh Filter Daily. Refer to page 6–9.

Inspect monthly. Clean if flow is restricted.

Autocleaner O-rings Daily. Refer to page 6–10.

Inspect monthly. Grease or replace as necessary.

Catalyst Heater Tube Packing

Replace packing every six months. Refer to page 6–11.

Replace the silica gel and quartz wool as directed.

Cellulose Filter

Replace when one inch of cellulose material turns black or uniformly brown. Refer to page 6–13.

Replace cellulose. Inspect o-rings. Clean or grease as necessary.

Combustion Tube Brush every five to ten analysis. Refer to page 6–15.

Inspect every eight hours.

Combustion Tube O-rings Replace if damaged. Refer to page 6–16.

Inspect every eight hours. Grease or replace as necessary.

Incoming Reagent Tube

When lecosorb turns white or anhydrone cakes. Refer to page 6–17.

Inspect daily and replace as necessary.

Lance and Filter Assembly Daily. Refer to page 6–19.

Clean when Cleaning Time message is displayed or at intervals set from system options.

Pinch Valve Tubing Replace every 90 days or if damaged. Refer to page 6–21.

Inspect monthly. Replace as necessary.

Reagent Tube Screen Filter Replace if damaged. Refer to page 6–23.

Inspect monthly. Clean or replace if flow is restricted.

Page 272: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–4 CS230 Maintenance

Anhydrone Tube

Removal

1. Slide the anhydrone tube upward until the bottom end can swing free. Refer to Figure 6-5, page 6–18.

2. Tilt out the free anhydrone tube end.

3. Pull the anhydrone tube downward off the top port.

4. To reinstall the anhydrone tube, push the top end of the anhydrone tube over the top port, tilt it inward and pull it down, pushing it over the bottom port.

Packing

1. Before packing the incoming reagent tube, remove all material from the inside of the incoming reagent tube; rinse it with water and let it dry.

2. Insert a screen filter into the bottom of the anhydrone tube. Refer to Figure 6-1, page 6–5. Position the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up onto the anhydrone tube 1/4 inch.

3. Pack 2 inches of quartz wool into the bottom of the anhydrone tube .

4. Pour 2 inches of anhydrone onto the quartz wool and gently tap it down. Add anhydrone as necessary to maintain a level of 2 inches.

5. Pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool on top of the anhydrone leaving a 1 inch opening at the top of the anhydrone tube.

6. Insert the reagent stop into the top of the anhydrone reagent tube. Push is firmly on top of the quartz wool to hold the packing material in place.

7. Reinstall the packed anhydrone tube into the lower left reagent tube port blocks on the front panel.

Page 273: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–5

Figure 6-1 Anhydrone Tube

502-1771/2" QUARTZ WOOL

501-1712" ANHYDRONE

601-390QUICK

DISCONNECTTUBE

502-1772" QUARTZ WOOL

775-306SCREEN FILTER

789-095REAGENT STOP

765-976O-RING

(2 REQ'D)

Page 274: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–6 CS230 Maintenance

Autocleaner

• The Autocleaner Kit is an optional accessory. Refer to Options, page 1–33, for ordering information.

• If the autocleaner is not installed, refer to page 6–19, Lance and Filter Assembly, for the combustion area cleaning procedure.

• The autocleaner should be disassembled daily and the lance cleaned.

• Refer to the following steps for operation with the DSP instrument.

Refer to System Options on page 4–19 and enable the autocleaner and door option. The Autocleaner will not function until these system options have been selected.

• The autocleaner cleans the combustion tube according to the clean interval programmed in the System Controls procedure, page 5–16. It is not recommended to set the clean counter at 0, as the Dust Filter Alarm will appear on the screen. Change the setting to 1 to 50.

• If cleaning is desired before the interval is reached, or if the configuration is set to clean the combustion tube at the operator's discretion, initiate a cleaning cycle from the analyze menu.

• Refer to the following steps for operation with the Windows® instrument.

Refer to System Configuration on page 4–59 and enable the autocleaner and door option. The Autocleaner will not function until these system options have been selected.

• The autocleaner cleans the combustion tube according to the clean interval programmed in the Configure Maintenance Counters procedure, page 4–46.

• If cleaning is desired before the clean interval is reached, or if the configuration is set to clean the combustion tube at the operator's discretion, initiate a cleaning cycle from the tool bar above the spreadsheet by clicking F10.

Notes

Keypad

Windows®

Page 275: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–7

Autocleaner Assembly

1. Unlock the autocleaner cap by pulling down on the plunger, rotate the autocleaner cap clockwise and lift the autocleaner cap. Refer to Figure 6-2, page 6–8.

2. Remove the autocleaner cap and lance assembly from the body assembly. Clean the end of the lance using the wire brush.

3. Clean the inside of the lance using the lance cleaning rod.

4. Inspect the brushes for wear. Remove the o-rings from the filter and replace them.

5. Reassemble the autocleaner cap and lance assembly to the autocleaner body.

Page 276: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–8 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-2 Autocleaner Assembly

604-291AIR CYLINDER

806-214FITTING

(2) REQ’D604-519

EXTENSION

193-143LOCKWASHER

604-517RETAINER

604-516FITTING

789-115LANCE TUBE

604-268BODY

ASSEMBLY

604-168LOCK

MOUNT

190-228SCREW

(2 REQ’D)604-159

PLUNGER

190-090THUMBSCREW

(2 REQ’D)

773-926PLATE

190-431SCREW

(2) REQ’D762-058O-RING

604-273BUSHINGADAPTOR

771-991O-RING

610-735SLOTTED

BRUSH

773-577PISTON RING

807-261FITTING

(2) REQ’D

778-703SPACER(4) REQ’D

773-320O-RING

(2 REQ’D)

193-164LOCKWASHER

(2 REQ’D)

604-272CAP

190-757SCREW

(4) REQ’D604-172O-RING

604-274SHAFT

604-163BRUSH

762-058O-RING

778-596FILTER

762-058O-RING

807-196TUBING

(2) REQ’D

Page 277: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–9

Autocleaner Mesh Filter

• The mesh filters, located in both the automatic cleaning mechanism and the lance and filter assembly, must be inspected monthly and cleaned or replaced when flow is restricted.

1. Turn off the oxygen gas flow.

2. Disconnect the gas lines to the autocleaner assembly (or lance and filter assembly).

3. Remove and disassemble the cleaning assembly.

4. Reach into the body assembly and pull the metal filter out.

5. Remove the o-rings from the filter using the o-ring removal tool.

6. Use one liter (or quart) of ultrasonic cleaner and 3.5 ml of Leconal wetting agent in 700 ml of room temperature water to clean the metal mesh filter.

7. Suspend the filter in the solution so it is completely immersed but does not touch the sides or bottom of the cleaner tank.

8. Switch the ultrasonic cleaner on and clean the filter for a minimum of 10 minutes.

• Higher frequency cleaners, which are generally more efficient, need less cleaning time than lower frequency cleaners.

9. While the filter is being cleaned, inspect the brush assembly.

A. Put a light coat of silicone grease on the brush shaft and plate assembly.

B. Insert the lance cleaning rod into the lance extension tube and clean out the lance extension tube.

10. After the filter has been cleaned, remove it from the tank and rinse it for two minutes under clean running water, then dry with warm air.

11. Wipe clean and lubricate the o-rings with silicone grease. Reinstall the o-rings.

12. Install the filter in the body assembly and reassemble the cleaning brush assembly if necessary.

13. Reconnect the gas lines.

Note

Note

Page 278: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–10 CS230 Maintenance

Autocleaner O-rings

• Every month, inspect the o-rings located in the autocleaner assembly and grease when needed.

1. Disconnect the pneumatic lines and the lance and measure flow lines.

2. Unlock the autocleaner cap by pulling down on the plunger, rotate the autocleaner cap clockwise and lift the autocleaner cap. Refer to Figure 6-2, page 6–8.

3. Unscrew the shaft from the air cylinder rod.

4. Unscrew the four screws from the air cylinder and remove the cylinder from the autocleaner cap.

5. Reach into the cap and remove both o-rings.

6. Wipe the o-rings and apply a small amount of fresh silicone grease to each. Replace the o-rings in the autocleaner cap.

7. For proper alignment when reassembling the auto cleaner:

A. Extend the air cylinder rod about two inches.

B. Slide the autocleaner cap over the rod and screw the shaft into the rod.

C. Set the screws and spacers in place.

D. Grasp the extension and push the shaft up into the bore of the autocleaner cap.

E. When the shaft is in the cap bore, the screws can be tightened down in radial fashion.

8. Replace the autocleaner cap on the body assembly and twist it counterclockwise.

Note

Page 279: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–11

Catalyst Heater Tube Packing

HIGH TEMPERATURE HAZARD The catalyst heater tube is extremely hot. Wear heat-resistant gloves when removing the tube.

1. Set the gas flow to OFF.

2. Locate the catalyst heater on the front panel.

3. Remove the movable block, from the top of the catalyst heater, by unscrewing the moveable block knob. Refer to Figure 6-3, page 6–12.

4. Lift the catalyst heater tube straight up to remove it and set it aside to cool.

5. Remove the packing material from the catalyst heater tube. Discard the packing material and clean the empty catalyst heater tube.

6. Insert 3/4 inch of quartz wool into the catalyst heater tube and position it at the bottom of the bubble in the catalyst heater tube.

7. Pour 1 inch of platinized silica gel into the catalyst heater tube filling the bubble above the quartz wool.

8. Insert 3/4 inch of quartz wool into the catalyst heater tube and position it on top of the platinized silica gel.

9. Carefully check the packed catalyst heater tube to ensure no strands of quartz wool are left in the neck of the catalyst heater tube.

10. Reinstall the catalyst heater tube using the procedure in steps 3 and 4.

11. Set the gas flow to ON.

WARNING

Page 280: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–12 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-3 Catalyst Heater Tube Packing

772-694MOVABLE

BLOCKKNOB

614-316MOVABLE

BLOCK

772-520O-RING

772-739TUBE

502-177/ " QUARTZ

WOOL3

4

502-177/ " QUARTZ

WOOL3

4

501-5871" PLATINUM

SILICA CATALYST

Page 281: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–13

Cellulose Filter

• When 1 inch of cellulose turns black or when the cellulose uniformly turns brown, replace the cellulose filter tube.

• Cellulose filter tube is located under the catalyst heater.

Removal

1. Slide the cellulose filter tube upward until the bottom end can swing free.

2. Tilt out the free cellulose filter tube end.

3. Pull the tube downward off the top port.

4. Using tweezers, remove the cellulose material and discard.

5. To reinstall the cellulose filter tube, push the top end of the cellulose filter tube over the top port, tilt it inward and pull it down, pushing it over the bottom port.

Packing

1. Fill the cellulose filter tube with 21/2 inches of cellulose material, packing the cellulose to a uniform density.

• The cellulose fibers should not be twisted.

• Leave 1/2 inch of the cellulose filter tube open at both ends for reinstallation onto the unit. Refer to Figure 6-4, page 6–14.

2. Reinstall the packed cellulose filter tube into the cellulose filter tube port blocks on the front panel.

Notes

Notes

Page 282: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–14 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-4 Cellulose Filter Packing

764-098CELLULOSE

771-030QUICK

DISCONNECTTUBE

Page 283: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–15

Combustion Tube

• If the autocleaner is installed the clean interval can be set to automatically clean the combustion tube. There are two procedures available, one for the DSP version and one for the Windows® version.

• Refer to the following steps for operation with the DSP instrument.

1. Refer to System Options, page 4–19, to enable the autocleaner and door option. Autocleaner will not function until the system option has been set.

2. The autocleaner cleans the combustion tube according to the clean interval programmed in the System Controls procedure, page 5–16. It is not recommended to set the clean counter at 0, as the Dust Filter Alarm will appear on the screen. Change the setting to 1 to 50.

3. If cleaning is desired before the interval is reached, or if the configuration is set to clean the combustion tube at the operator's discretion, initiate a cleaning cycle from the analyze menu.

• Refer to the following steps for operation with the Windows® instrument.

4. Refer to System Configuration, page 4–59, to enable the autocleaner and door option. Autocleaner will not function until the system option has been set.

5. The autocleaner cleans the combustion tube according to the clean interval programmed in the Maintenance Counters procedure, page 4–46.

6. If cleaning is desired before the clean interval is reached, or if the configuration is set to clean the combustion tube at the operator's discretion, initiate a cleaning cycle from the tool bar above the spreadsheet by clicking F10.

• If the lance and filter assembly is installed, perform the following procedure.

7. Brush the combustion tube every five to ten analyses to remove dust from the screen filter and combustion area.

8. Inspect the combustion tube every eight hours for severe pitting and slag build-up. Remove and clean the combustion tube if necessary.

Notes

Keypad

Windows®

Note

Page 284: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–16 CS230 Maintenance

Combustion Zone O-rings

Inspect both combustion zone o-rings every 8 hours of operation. Check for contamination or damage. One o-ring is located at the top of the combustion tube. The other o-ring is a red silicone o-ring located at the bottom of the combustion tube. Refer to Figure 2-9, page 2–19.

Page 285: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–17

Incoming Reagent Tube

Removal

1. Slide each reagent tube upward until the bottom end can swing free. Refer to Figure 6-5, page 6–18.

2. Tilt out the free reagent tube end.

3. Pull the tube downward off the top port.

4. To reinstall the reagent tube, push the top end of the reagent tube over the top port, tilt it inward and pull it down, pushing it over the bottom port.

Packing

1. Before packing the reagent tube, remove all material from the inside of the reagent tube; rinse it with water and let it dry.

2. Insert a screen filter into the bottom of each reagent tube. Position the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up into the reagent tube 1/4 inch. Refer to Figure 6-6, page 6–18.

3. Insert a screen filter into the bottom of the reagent tube, see Figure 6-6, page 6–18. Position the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up onto the reagent tube 1/4 inch.

4. Pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool into the bottom of the reagent tube.

5. Pour 1 inch of anhydrone onto the quartz wool and gently tap it down. Add anhydrone as necessary to maintain a level of 1 inch.

6. Pour Lecosorb onto the anhydrone until all but the top 1/2 inch of the reagent tube is filled, gently tapping it down.

7. Firmly pack 1/2 inch of quartz wool on top of the Lecosorb filling the bubble in the reagent tube.

8. Reinstall the packed reagent tube into the lower left reagent tube port blocks on the front panel.

Page 286: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–18 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-5 Reagent Tube Removal

Figure 6-6 Reagent Tube Packing

771-373REAGENT

TUBE

502-177/ " QUARTZ WOOL12

502-1742" LECOSORB

771-373QUICK DISCONNECT

TUBE

501-1711" ANHYDRONE

502-177/ " QUARTZ WOOL12

775-306SCREEN FILTER

Page 287: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–19

Lance and Filter Assembly

• The lance and filter assembly should be cleaned when the cleaning counter reaches the preset limit.

• If the optional vacuum cleaner was installed, it may be used to remove dirt, soot, or debris from the lance, combustion area, and furnace shelf.

• If the autocleaner is installed, refer to Autocleaner, page 6–6, for mesh filter cleaning.

1. Loosen the connection on the lance flow inlet 1/4 turn and disconnect the line.

2. Unscrew the filter cap. Scrape and remove the dust and soot from inside the filter cap. Refer to Figure 6-7, page 6–20.

• If the vacuum cleaner is installed, it may be turned on to draw dust from the filter housing.

3. Thoroughly brush the entire lance guard using the cleaning brush.

4. Insert the cleaning brush into the combustion tube chamber and brush the inside of the chamber several times.

5. Inspect the tip of the lance to verify that it is open. If it is clogged, open it using the lance cleaning rod. Refer to Figure 6-7, page 6–20.

6. Replace the filter cap and reconnect the lance flow line.

7. Turn the vacuum cleaner off if it was used during the cleaning process.

Notes

Note

Page 288: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–20 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-7 Lance and Filter Assembly

NOTE: * NOT PART OF ASSEMBLY

773-311FILTER 781-422

FILTER CAP

781-424O-RING

781-663LANCEGUARD

789-118LANCE TUBEASSEMBLY

762-068O-RING

772-381LANCE

CLEANINGROD

LANCETUBE

762-058O-RING

771-991O-RING

*773-136FITTING

*772-704FITTING

762-058O-RING

773-577PISTON

RING

781-425FILTER END

PLATE190-258SCREW

(2) REQ’D

190-431SCREW

(4) REQ’D

*781-401ADAPTER

RING

781-421FILTER

HOUSING

781-423ADAPTOR TUBE

BUSHING

Page 289: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–21

Pinch Valve Tubing

• Replace the pinch valve tubing, which passes through the pinch valve assembly that controls dust ejection, every 90 days. Only use silicone tubing for replacement.

1. Remove the dust box and vacuum hose from the right side of the furnace and remove the right side furnace panel.

2. Turn off the pneumatic gas supply and relieve the pressure.

3. Remove the two screws holding the furnace interlock relay and pinch valve assembly in place. Refer to Figure 11-3 on page 11-5.

4. Set the furnace interlock relay and screws aside.

5. Remove the two screws retaining the pinch valve cap. Refer to Figure 6-8, page 6–22.

6. Slide the tubing off the cup assembly.

7. Replace the silicone tube and reassemble pinch valve assembly.

8. Position the pinch valve assembly and furnace interlock relay in place. Fasten using the two screws removed in step #4.

9. Replace the side panel, sliding the silicone tube through the hole provided at the bottom of the side panel.

10. Replace the dust box and vacuum hose then restore pneumatic pressure.

Note

Page 290: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–22 CS230 Maintenance

Figure 6-8 Pinch Valve Assembly

190-246SCREW

(2 REQ'D)616-892BRACKET

774-612HOUSING

774-613O-RING

774-610PISTON

776-093CAP

190-246SCREW

(2 REQ'D)

501-110-019SILICONE

TUBE

589-182FITTING

769-973ROLL PIN(2 REQ'D)

772-909PINCH VALVE

ASSEMBLY

Page 291: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–23

Reagent Tube Screen Filter

• Clean the screen filter in the reagent tube whenever the reagents are replaced.

1. Tap the filter lightly to remove any dust.

2. If necessary, clean the filter in an ultrasonic cleaner.

Note

Page 292: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–24 CS230 Maintenance

Login Periodic Maintenance

After periodic maintenance is performed it should be recorded. To electronically record maintenance the procedures under maintenance should be used. Login permits the service technician or operator to enter maintenance that was performed. View log file automatically enters past events and maintenance performed.

Logging in periodic maintenance creates a periodic maintenance history file, sets the analysis counter back to zero, increments the reset counter, enters the reset data and enters any comments.

1. Click Maintenance and select Login. The Maintenance screen will appear.

2. Click the Maintenance Item Check Box that periodic maintenance was performed on. Items that need maintenance will have already been checked.

3. Click the Comment Box and enter any maintenance comments.

4. Click OK.

Page 293: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–25

View Log File

The Log File is a history of past events. Every time one of the following procedures is performed it will be recorded in the Log File.

• Change of Mass by Operator

• Data Out of Range (Ambient Monitor parameter values)

• Date of last calibration, drift or blank

• Date scheduled maintenance is performed

• Dust Clog in System

• Equivalency Test Results (the variation between the two CO2 cells)

• Network Errors

• Network Sign-on Errors

• Sample Aborted

• Sample Deleted

• Standard check out-of-range

1. Click Maintenance and select View Log File the Log File screen will appear.

2. Click Print to receive a printout of the log file on the system printer.

3. Click OK when finished.

Page 294: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–26 CS230 Maintenance

Reset Maintenance Counters

• After maintenance is performed a history log of maintenance is generated. Refer to View Log File on page 6–25. This information can be used to verify that maintenance was performed and help troubleshoot problems that may occur during operation.

1. Select the Maintenance and click Login. The Maintenance dialog box will appear.

2. Select the item(s) that maintenance has been performed on.

3. Click OK.

Note

Page 295: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Maintenance CS230 6–27

4. The Confirm dialog box for the first maintenance item will appear.

A. Click Yes if maintenance was performed.

B. Click No if maintenance was not performed.

C. Click Cancel to exit procedure.

5. The Confirm dialog box for the second maintenance item will appear.

A. Click Yes if maintenance was performed.

B. Click No if maintenance was not performed.

C. Click Cancel to exit procedure.

6. Continue until all maintenance items were displayed in the Confirm dialog boxes and answer Yes, No or Cancel to the procedure.

Page 296: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

6–28 CS230 Maintenance

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 297: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Theory of Operation CS230 7–1

7 7 Theory of Operation

Illustrations .......................................................................7–2 General Information............................................................7–3 Infrared Radiation, Absorption, and Detection.........................7–4 Comparator Level ...............................................................7–8

Theory of Operation

Page 298: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

7–2 CS230 Theory of Operation

Illustrations

Figure 7-1 ......... Gas Flow Diagram...................................... 7–6 Figure 7-2 ......... Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram.............. 7–7

Page 299: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Theory of Operation CS230 7–3

General Information

The CS230 Carbon/Sulfur Determinator is a microprocessor based, software driven instrument for measurement of carbon and sulfur content in metals, ores, ceramics, and other inorganic materials. The CS230 uses an induction furnace and measures carbon and sulfur by infrared absorption.

Analysis begins by weighing out a sample (1 g nominal) into a ceramic crucible on a balance. Accelerator material is added, the crucible is placed on the loading pedestal, and the analyze key is pressed. Furnace closure is performed automatically, then the combustion chamber is purged with oxygen to drive off residual atmospheric gases. After purging, oxygen flow through the system is restored and the induction furnace is turned on. The inductive elements of the sample and accelerator couple with the high frequency field of the furnace. The pure oxygen environment and the heat generated by this coupling cause the sample to combust. During combustion, carbon bearing elements are reduced, releasing the carbon, which immediately binds with the oxygen to form CO and CO2, the majority being CO2. Also, sulfur-bearing elements are reduced, releasing sulfur, which binds with oxygen to form SO2.

Sample gases are swept into the carrier stream. Sulfur is measured as sulfur dioxide in the first IR cell. A small amount of carbon monoxide is converted to carbon dioxide in the catalytic heater assembly; SO2 is converted to SO3, while sulfur trioxide is removed from the system in a cellulose filter. Carbon is measured as carbon dioxide in the IR cell as gases flow through the IR cells.

The optional automatic autocleaner is ideal for high volume applications and reduces operator time. The autocleaner brushes the filter screen and combustion tube at intervals specified in System Configuration.

Page 300: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

7–4 CS230 Theory of Operation

Infrared Radiation, Absorption, and Detection

The infrared (IR) source consists of nichrome wire that is resistance-heated to 850oC. The IR source radiates visible energy as well as all wavelengths in the infrared spectrum. The description below uses carbon dioxide although, the same principle applies to sulfur detection.

Carbon dioxide absorbs IR energy at a precise wavelength within the IR spectrum. Energy from the IR source is absorbed as the gas passes through the cell, preventing it from reaching the IR detector. All other IR energy is prevented from reaching the IR detector by a narrow bandpass filter. Because of the filter, the absorption of IR energy can be attributed only to carbon dioxide (CO2). The concentration of CO2 is detected as a reduction in the level of energy at the detector.

One IR cell is used as both a reference and for measurement. The total carbon, as carbon dioxide, is detected on a continuous and simultaneous basis. The cell consists of an IR source, chopper motor, a narrow bandpass filter, a condensing cone, an IR energy detector and the cell body. Radiated energy is chopped at a rate of 87.5 Hz. before it enters the cell body. The chopped energy enters the cell body through a window, travels through the cell body, then exits through a second window and a precise bandpass filter. The selective filter passes only the CO2 absorption wavelength into a condensing cone that concentrates the energy on the detector. The solid state detector is AC coupled to a preamplifier. As the gas concentration increases, the voltage to the preamplifier decreases.

The starting reference level, or baseline, for the detector is established by running 100% oxygen through the cell. The pure oxygen environment permits the maximum amount of energy to reach the detector. This maximum energy level is AC coupled to the preamp where it is amplified, rectified, and filtered. It is then sent to an A/D converter where the analog signal is converted to a digital signal. The nominal voltage read at the cell output, via the Ambient Monitor, is 8.500 VDC.

During every analysis, the computer reads the baseline. This level is then adjusted digitally until a nominal level is achieved. For example, if the cell output is 8.400 VDC, then this level is change digitally until the level reads 8.500 VDC. This level change is done in the computer and used for a reference, if the cell output voltage were actually measured, no change would be observed.

Page 301: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Theory of Operation CS230 7–5

As analysis begins, the cell output decreases with the amount of carbon (as CO2) present in the cell. The computer reads the cell output 20 times per second and produces data points that are stored in memory. The computer then processes the curve or graph formed by these data points. The curve or graph is then used by the computer to calculate the element weight percent of an unknown sample.

Page 302: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

7–6 CS230 Theory of Operation

PS

EXHAUST

SV7

2

22 3

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

COIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

SV10

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2NCNO

DOOR SOL.

AUTO CLEANER

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV6NC

NO

NCNO

DOWN

FURNACEBYPASS FLOW

UP

PRESSURESWITCH

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

QUARTZWOOL

MEASURE FLOW

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3

UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

PS

PS

4 PSI

4 PSI

BYPASS BLOCK

Figure 7-1

Gas Flow Diagram

Page 303: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Theory of Operation CS230 7–7

PS

EXHAUST

SV7

2

22 3

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

COIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

SV10

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2NCNO

DOOR SOL.

AUTO CLEANER

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV6NC

NO

NCNO

DOWN

FURNACEBYPASS FLOW

UP

PRESSURESWITCH

PINCH VALVE

DUSTEJECT

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

QUARTZWOOL

MEASURE FLOW

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3

UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

PS

PS

4 PSI

4 PSI

Figure 7-2

Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram

Page 304: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

7–8 CS230 Theory of Operation

Comparator Level

• One comparator level is associated with each analysis method. Selecting a different method also selects a new comparator level.

An analysis that lasts excessively long causes unnecessarily long delays, while an analysis that isn’t long enough can cause loss of significant analyte data collection. Since not all samples combust in the same manner, analyses should not be performed based on time alone.

The length of each analysis is determined on an individual basis by the minimum analysis time and the comparator level. Analysis ends when the minimum time limit is reached and the analyte rate drops below the comparator level after passing its peak. This comparator level is a preset constant (k) plus a percent of the peak:

COMPARATOR LEVEL = k + (X)(P)

P Detector output peak

X Selected comparator level percentage

During an analysis, the output of the detector is collected in the form of digital data and summed to arrive at the analysis result. If this data were plotted, it would reflect the curve of the detector output.

Note

Page 305: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Theory of Operation CS230 7–9

Shown below are two examples of the same detector output curve (buffer plot). The first example shows the amount of detector output collected during an analysis with a comparator level setting at 6% while the second example illustrates at 25%.

The following conclusions can be drawn from the examples:

1. A high comparator level shortens analysis time.

2. A low comparator level includes more sample gas, and therefore more sulfur, into result calculations.

3. A comparator level that is too low, however, results in the inclusion of very low concentrations that don’t significantly effect the result (noise), but lengthen the analysis.

A comparator level of 1.0% usually provides optimum performance by allowing the collection of all significant output within a reasonable time.

End of Analysis where "X" equals 25.0%

DETECTOR OUTPUTCOLLECTED

START OFANALYSIS

DETECTOROUTPUT COMPARATOR

LEVEL-END OF ANALYSIS

P

End of Analysis where "X" equals 6%

DETECTOR OUTPUTCOLLECTED

START OFANALYSIS

DETECTOROUTPUT COMPARATOR

LEVEL-END OF ANALYSIS

P

Page 306: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

7–10 CS230 Theory of Operation

Extremely low output peaks may need a larger comparator level to exclude insignificant output levels produced toward the end of analysis and cut down on drift. The minimum time should be extended to match what would be considered a reasonable time length for the analysis of such samples. The combination of a high comparator level and an extended minimum analysis time insures that all significant output is collected and analysis time lengths are consistent without being extensive.

Whenever the comparator level changes check the system calibration since interaction can occur.

SIGNIFICANTDETECTOR

OUTPUTEXCLUDED

DETECTOROUTPUT

COLLECTED

COMPARATOR LEVEL(SET TOO HIGH)

INSIGNIFICANTDETECTOR

OUTPUT

DETECTOROUTPUT

COLLECTED

COMPARATOR LEVEL(SET TOO LOW)

Page 307: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–1

8 8 Diagnostics

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed page 8–17.

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 8–4.

Keypad Diagnostics Contents:

Diagnostics........................................................................8–4 Ambient Monitor.................................................................8–5

Ambient Monitor Definitions ............................................8–7 Switch States.....................................................................8–8 Valve States ......................................................................8–9 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–10

Definitions.................................................................. 8–11 Print Buffer...................................................................... 8–12 Plot Buffer ....................................................................... 8–13 System Print.................................................................... 8–15 Reset Memory.................................................................. 8–16 Diagnostics for Windows® .................................................. 8–17 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–19

Leak Check................................................................. 8–20 Leak Check Definitions ................................................. 8–21

Ambient Monitor............................................................... 8–22 Ambients.................................................................... 8–23

Diagnostics

Windows®

Keypad

Keypad

Windows®

Page 308: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–2 CS230 Diagnostics

Ambient Monitor Definitions ..................................... 8–24 Ambient Monitor Ranges.......................................... 8–25

Switches ......................................................................... 8–26 Solenoids ................................................................... 8–27

Comport.......................................................................... 8–28

Page 309: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–3

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 310: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–4 CS230 Diagnostics

Diagnostics

This procedure permits the operator to view and print the ambient monitor, view the digital input switch states, view and change the solenoid valve states, and perform system leak checks.

• Access the diagnostics menu by pressing [5] Diagnostics from the main menu.

Note

Diagnostic

[1] Ambient Monitor [2] Switches [3] Valves [4] Leak Check [5] Print Buffer [6] Plot Buffer

Page 311: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–5

Ambient Monitor

• The ambient monitor is used to display system parameters during servicing of the unit.

• If the determinator has just been turned on, wait one to two hours for the system to stabilize.

• The ambient monitor will continuously update as the operator views it.

1. From the main menu, press [5] Diagnostics then press [1] Ambient Monitor to display the ambient monitor.

2. Check that all system parameters, temperatures, and voltages fall within the range limits shown below.

Parameter Nominal Value Range Units

Carbon IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

Sulfur IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

Oven Temp 48 46 to 50 oC

Catalyst Heater 350 325 to 375 oC

System Pressure 750 Elevation Dependent mmHg

Plate Current* 460 420 to 500 mA

Grid Current* 100 80 to 120 mA

*Nominal values during analysis only. When furnace power is off, the plate and grid current should be zero.

Notes

Ambient Monitor

Carbon IR Cell 8.500 V Sulfur IR Cell 8.500 V Oven Temp 48oC Catalyst Heater 350oC System Pressure 725 mm Plate Current 480 mA Grid Current 100 mA

Page 312: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–6 CS230 Diagnostics

3. Press Select to toggle the displayed parameters between voltages and units.

4. Press Menu to display the ambient monitor menu.

5. Press [1] Display Units to display the system parameters in voltages, temperatures, and pressure.

6. Press [2] Display Voltages to display the A/D output voltages.

7. Press Exit to remove the ambient monitor menu and return to the ambient monitor screen.

Diagnostics Ambient Monitor

[1] Display Units [2] Display Voltages [3] Print

Page 313: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–7

Ambient Monitor Definitions

CO2 Detector—The IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell should have an output of approximately 8.5 volts.

SO2 Detector—The IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell should have an output of approximately 8.5 volts.

Oven Temperature—The temperature of the IR cell oven. The value is in degrees centigrade. The oven temperature should be approximately 48 oC.

Catalyst Heater Temperature—The temperature of the Measure Flow Catalyst Heater in degrees centigrade. The temperature of the catalyst heater should be set at 350 oC.

System—The System Barometric Pressure in mmHg measured by the barometric pressure transducer on the back-pressure controller board. Typically the barometric pressure should be 20 mmHg above current local barometric pressure.

Plate Current—The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the plate of the oscillator vacuum tube V1. As RF power increases during analysis the plate current rises.

Grid Current—The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the grid of the oscillator vacuum tube V1. As RF power increases during analysis the grid current rises.

Page 314: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–8 CS230 Diagnostics

Switch States

• Switch states permits the operator or service technician to monitor the digital input switch states.

• This is a status screen, none of the switch states can be changed from this screen.

1. Press [2] Switches to display the digital input switch states.

2. Press Exit to return to the diagnostics menu.

Notes

Switches

Description State Pneumatic Pressure Closed Lance Pressure Open Piston Up Limit Closed Oxygen Pressure Closed Piston Control Open Brush Down LSW Open Brush Up LSW Closed Door Open LSW Closed Piston Down Limit Open

Page 315: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–9

Valve States

• This procedure permits the operator or service technician to change the state of each solenoid valve listed.

• Each solenoid valve has a quick access number. To quickly access a solenoid valve, press the corresponding number on the keypad.

1. Press [3] Valves to display the solenoid valve status screen.

2. Press Next to move the cursor down the list of solenoid valves.

3. Press Previous to move the cursor up the list of solenoid valves.

4. Press Yes to turn each solenoid valve on

5. Press No to turn each solenoid valve off.

6. Press Select to toggle the state of each solenoid valve between on and off.

7. Press Exit to return to the diagnostics menu.

Notes

Valves

## Description State 1 Oxygen Carrier > Off 2 Furnace Bypass Off 3 Lance Solenoid Off 4 Furnace Gas Off 5 Safety Solenoid Off 6 Purge Solenoid Off 7 Piston Solenoid Off 8 Door Solenoid Off 9 Brush Solenoid Off more

Page 316: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–10 CS230 Diagnostics

Leak Check

• The leak check procedure determines if leaks are present in the combustion and measure systems and checks for leaks both into and out of the system.

1. From the diagnostics menu, press [4] Leak Check to display the leak check menu.

• After the system pressurizes, it will wait 60 seconds before the OK message will appear. If a leak is detected, the ‘Leak In System’ message can occur before the 60 second time period is complete.

2. From the leak check menu, select one of the two choices:

A. Choose [1] Entire System to perform an entire system leak check. The entire system leak check screen will appear.

B. Press [2] By-Pass Furnace to perform a leak check with the furnace/combustion area by-passed. The screen that appears will be identical to entire system leak check.

Note

Note

Leak Check

[1] Entire System [2] By-Pass Furnace

Page 317: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–11

• A negative number, under change in pressure, indicates a leak into the system (an increase in pressure). A positive number, under change in pressure, indicates a leak out of the system (a decrease in pressure).

• If a leak is indicated, refer to the Leak Check Flow Diagrams Figure 10-7 and Figure 10-8, pages 10–19 and 10–20.

3. Press Exit to return to the leak check menu.

Definitions

System Pressure—The operating pressure of the system before it is pressurized. The system pressure will not change as the system is being pressurized.

Initial Pressure—The system pressure at the start of system pressurization. Normally, initial pressure is the same value as system pressure.

Current Pressure—The system pressure at the current time. The current pressure changes rapidly as the system is being pressurized.

Change Pressure—The difference between the initial pressure and the current pressure. A negative number indicates an increase in system pressure. A positive number indicates a decrease in system pressure.

Time—The length of time, in seconds, that the test has been running. Normally, after 60 seconds the test is complete.

Notes

Page 318: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–12 CS230 Diagnostics

Print Buffer

From the diagnostics menu, choose [5] Print Buffer to receive a printout from the system printer of the buffer contents from the last carbon analysis and then return to the diagnostics menu.

Page 319: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–13

Plot Buffer

• Plot buffer prints a graph of the sample rate of change in concentration, as measured by the IR cell, over a period of time.

• The area between the base line and plotted curve is the integrated concentration of sample gas as it passes through the IR cell.

1. From the diagnostics menu, choose [6] Plot Buffer to display the plot buffer screen.

2. Press Next/Previous to move the highlight and select the parameter values to edit.

3. Press Select to move the highlight down and select the parameters to edit.

4. Press the number keys to enter the parameter value.

5. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to a digit position and enter the digit value, with the number keys on the keypad.

Notes

Carbon

X-axis Start 0 End 48 Y-axis Start 0 End 6000

Page 320: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–14 CS230 Diagnostics

6. Press Menu to display the print plot menu or Exit to return to the diagnostic menu.

7. Press [1] Print to receive a printed plot of sample concentration verses time on the system printer. After the plot is printed, the diagnostics menu will be displayed.

Carbon

[1] Print

Page 321: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–15

System Print

• System print prints out the system operating parameters on the system printer.

• The system operating parameters include the following: System Options, Analysis Method, Transmit Options, Balance Options, System Controls, Combustion Furnace, Reduction Furnace (Catalyst Heater), and Ambient Monitor.

1. Press [7] System Print from diagnostics menu to receive a printout of the system operating parameters on the system printer. After the system parameters are printed, the diagnostics menu will be displayed.

2. Press Exit to return to the main menu.

Notes

Page 322: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–16 CS230 Diagnostics

Reset Memory

• Reset memory resets the system operating parameters to their default values.

• Before the memory is reset, print the system operating parameters using system print to obtain a record of the parameter values if replacement is necessary.

1. Press Yes to reset values back to their default values.

2. Press [8] Reset Memory from the diagnostics menu to reset the system operating parameters back to their default values. The diagnostics menu will be displayed.

3. Press Exit to return to the main menu.

Notes

Page 323: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–17

Diagnostics for Windows®

• For instruments using DSP software refer to the instructions listed on page 8–4.

• For instruments using Windows® software refer to the instructions listed on page 8–17.

Keypad Diagnostics Contents:

Diagnostics........................................................................8–4 Ambient Monitor.................................................................8–5

Ambient Monitor Definitions ............................................8–7 Switch States.....................................................................8–8 Valve States ......................................................................8–9 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–10

Definitions.................................................................. 8–11 Print Buffer...................................................................... 8–12 Plot Buffer ....................................................................... 8–13 System Print.................................................................... 8–15 Reset Memory.................................................................. 8–16 Diagnostics for Windows® .................................................. 8–17 Leak Check...................................................................... 8–19

Leak Check................................................................. 8–20 Leak Check Definitions ................................................. 8–21

Ambient Monitor............................................................... 8–22 Ambients.................................................................... 8–23

Ambient Monitor Definitions ..................................... 8–24 Ambient Monitor Ranges.......................................... 8–25

Switches ......................................................................... 8–26

Keypad

Windows®

Keypad

Page 324: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–18 CS230 Diagnostics

Solenoids ................................................................... 8–27 Comport.......................................................................... 8–28

Page 325: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–19

Leak Check

This procedure automatically check the measurement system of the instrument for a gas leak. The entire system can be checked or the operator can by-pass the furnace to isolate the leak.

During a system leak check the system is pressured to 500 mm Hg above current system pressure and sealed. It is then permitted to equilibrate. For the next 60 seconds the system pressure is measured. If the pressure remains within 5 mm Hg of the pressurized value the system passes the leak check (for system check only). If the pressure changes more than 5 mm Hg of the pressurized value the leak check fails.

In the Leak Check Progress box the status of the leak check is displayed. If a leak check fails it may be caused by gas leaking into or out of the system.

If “Change in Pressure” has increased the incoming valve SV6 may be malfunctioning or the catalyst heater tubes are not at a steady temperature. If “Change in Pressure” has decreased gas is leaking out of the system.

If a leak is present, "Leak Check Failed" appears next to “Leak Check Status”. If there isn't a leak " Leak Check Passed" appears. If the system fails a leak check and a leak is detected, perform a “by-pass the furnace” leak check to isolate the leak.

Before a leak check is performed the instrument should warm up for at least for 30 minutes and the catalyst heater tubes must be at a steady temperature. It is recommended that a leak check be performed after autocleaner maintenance, furnace maintenance or anytime a reagent tube is removed or replaced.

Page 326: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–20 CS230 Diagnostics

Leak Check

1. Click Diagnostics and select Leak Check. The Leak Check screen will appear.

2. Click System Leak Check to perform a leak check on the entire measurement system or click By-pass Furnace Leak Check to perform a leak check of the measurement with the furnace bypassed. The result of the leak check will appear in the Results box.

3. Click Stop Leak Check to stop a leak check in progress.

4. Click Print to print the results of the leak check on the system printer.

5. Click View to look at various areas inside the instrument where a leak may be found.

Page 327: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–21

Leak Check Definitions

Starting System Pressure—The operating pressure of the system before it is pressurized. The system pressure will not change as the system is being pressurized.

Initial Pressure—The system pressure at the start of system pressurization. Normally, initial pressure is the same value as system pressure.

Current Pressure—The system pressure at the current time. The current pressure changes rapidly as the system is being pressurized.

Change Pressure—The difference between the initial pressure and the current pressure. A negative number indicates an increase in system pressure. A positive number indicates a decrease in system pressure.

Elapsed Time—The length of time, in seconds, that the test has been running. Normally, after 60 seconds the test is complete.

Page 328: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–22 CS230 Diagnostics

Ambient Monitor

This procedure permits the operator to view and print the ambient monitor parameter values.

Refer to Ambient Monitor Definitions, on page 8–24, for Ambient Monitor Definitions.

Page 329: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–23

Ambients

1. Click Diagnostics and select Ambients to display the Ambient Monitor screen.

2. Click the Check Box, to the left of the desired parameter, to plot the parameter value in the graph above the chart. More than one parameter can be plotted on the graph. Hold down the Control Key and click the Parameter Check Box for each parameter to be plotted. A yellow circle with an exclamation point to the left of the check box indicates the parameter value is outside the desired range of values.

3. Click the right mouse button, with the mouse pointer inside the graph, to reset, restore, zoom in, zoom out, and set the graph range. The parameter value is displayed on the vertical axis and the time is displayed on the horizontal axis. The box in the lower left corner of the graph displays the hours since the instrument was turned on or the graph reset. The hours reset to 0 after 24.

4. Right-click the Parameter Name to reset the parameter values and time on the chart and graph.

5. Click Print to print the parameter values on the system printer.

Page 330: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–24 CS230 Diagnostics

Ambient Monitor Definitions

Oven Temperature—The temperature of the IR cell oven. The value is in degrees centigrade. The oven temperature should be approximately 48 oC.

System—The System Barometric Pressure in mmHg measured by the barometric pressure transducer on the back-pressure controller board. Typically the barometric pressure should be 20 mmHg above current local barometric pressure.

Catalyst Heater Temperature—The temperature of the Measure Flow Catalyst Heater in degrees centigrade. The temperature of the catalyst heater should be set at 350 oC.

Plate Current—The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the plate of the oscillator vacuum tube V1. As RF power increases during analysis the plate current rises.

Grid Current—The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the grid of the oscillator vacuum tube V1. As RF power increases during analysis the grid current rises.

CO2 Detector—The IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell should have an output of approximately 8.5 volts.

SO2 Detector—The IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell should have an output of approximately 8.5 volts.

Page 331: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–25

Ambient Monitor Ranges

• This symbol will appear next to the parameter name, on the ambient monitor screen, if the parameter value is out of minimum or maximum range.

Parameter Nominal Value Range Units

Oven Temp 48 46 to 50 oC

System Pressure 750 Elevation Dependent mmHg

Catalyst Heater 350 325 to 375 oC

Plate Current* 460 420 to 500 mA

Grid Current* 100 80 to 120 mA

Carbon IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

Sulfur IR Cell 8.5 7.5 to 9.2 V

* The values shown for these parameters are typical values during an analysis.

Note

Page 332: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–26 CS230 Diagnostics

Switches

Switches are used throughout the instrument as sensors to determine the status of a condition. They’re not only used to control the instrument, they're used for safety to prevent the instrument from damage and the operator from harm.

The Switch screen is a diagnostic status screen. None of the switch states can be changed from this screen. View the screen to determine the switch status. Refer to Switch Conditions to determine the meaning of each condition.

1. Click Diagnostics and select Switches. The Switches screen will appear.

2. Click Close to exit the switches screen.

Page 333: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Diagnostics CS230 8–27

Solenoids

The Solenoids screen permits the service technician or operator to toggle the solenoid valves either on or off. It is also used to test operation of the Quick Loader and Quick Feeder.

By using the cycle test drop down box the service technician or operator can check the operation of the Quick Loader and Quick Feeder.

1. Click Diagnostics and select Solenoids. The Solenoid screen will appear.

2. Click the check box to the left of the solenoid valve to activate it. Observe operation of the instrument and solenoid valve.

3. Click Close to exit the solenoids screen.

Page 334: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

8–28 CS230 Diagnostics

Comport

Comport is a diagnostic utility that can be used by the service technician, operator and software engineer to troubleshoot the instrument. In some cases it may be of advantage to the service person and LECO to analyze the data collected by this utility for diagnostic and trouble shooting purposes. Comport must be used with direction from a LECO engineer.

1. Click Diagnostics and select Communications. The Communications screen will appear.

2. Click the Pause Check Box to stop the data scrolling in the communications data window.

3. Click the Hide Status Messages check box to stop the analysis status messages from being displayed.

4. Click Copy to Clipboard to copy comport data to the clipboard. From the clipboard, data can be copied to a file.

• If Hide Status Messages is checked only error messages will be displayed.

Note

Page 335: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–1

9 9 Electronic Adjustments

Illustrations .......................................................................9–2 Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Adjustment ....................9–3 Catalyst Heater Control Card................................................9–5 Induction Power Control Card...............................................9–7 Oven Heater Control Card.................................................. 9–10 IR Cell ............................................................................ 9–11

Electronic Adjustments

Page 336: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–2 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

Illustrations

Figure 9-1 ......... Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Card ..... 9–4 Figure 9-2 ......... Catalyst Heater Control Card ....................... 9–6 Figure 9-3 ......... Induction Power Control Card ...................... 9–9 Figure 9-4 ......... Oven Heater Control Card ........................... 9–10 Figure 9-5 ......... IR Cell Adjustment Location ........................ 9–12

Page 337: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–3

Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Adjustment

This adjustment has been factory set to a highest anticipated barometric pressure of 762 mm. If the highest anticipated pressure in the operational environment varies more than ±5 mm from 762 mm, this adjustment must be performed to eliminate calibration shifts that may occur as a result of barometric pressure changes.

The present (operation environment) barometric pressure must be determined. If an accurate method of measurement is not available, the nearest weather bureau or airport can provide this information. The pressure must be referenced to the operational site altitude, not sea level. The highest anticipated pressure for the area must also be determined.

• The determinator power must be on for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to performing this adjustment.

• The furnace piston must be in the up position and the furnace power switch must be in the on position.

• This adjustment should be performed if the barometric pressure transducer or PID pressure regulator card is replaced.

1. Insure that the jumpers on the circuit board are installed as follows, see Figure 9-1, page 9–4:

A. J1—The two pins nearest transistor Q2 should be jumpered.

B. J2, J3 and J4—Both pins on each connector should be jumpered.

2. Insure that the controls on the circuit board are positioned as follows, see Figure 9-1, page 9–4:

A. R27—Set to 9.

B. R28—Set to 2.

C. R29—Set to 5.

3. Remove the left side panel of the determinator.

4. Turn the AC power on to both the determinator and furnace.

Notes

Page 338: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–4 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

5. From the main menu, press [4] Setup and then [6] Set Barometer. Set the barometric pressure to the current value at the location of the determinator.

6. From the main menu, press [1] Analyze and then Menu to display the analysis menu.

7. Press [4] System Controls. Set carrier gas to on.

8. From the main menu, press [5] Diagnostics and then [1] Ambient Monitor. Monitor the system pressure.

9. While monitoring the system pressure, adjust control R30, on the PID pressure regulator card, for a system pressure value of 20 mmHg above the highest expected barometric pressure value. Refer to Figure 9-1, below.

A. Turn the adjustment clockwise to decrease pressure.

B. Turn the adjustment counterclockwise to increase pressure.

10. Reinstall the left side panel of the determinator.

Figure 9-1 Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Card

5

0 10

5

0 10

5

0 10

CO

PYR

IGH

T C

19

93A

LL R

IGH

TS R

ESER

VED

LEC

O C

ORP

OR

ATIO

NST

, JO

SEPH

, MI U

.S.A

.CR1

C1

R1

R2

LED1 J038J038A

C2 C4C3 C6

R6R10

R11

R7

C5

CR

3R

25

R24

C17

C19

C21

CR

4C11

C16

C18

C20

C15C14C12

U3

R26

R29R28R27

R30

R12

R14

R13

C9

R3

R4 R

5

R15

R16

R17

R18 R

19 R20

R21

R22 R

23

C13

C10

J038C

J3J2 J4

D P I

J038B

TP5

U4

C7 C8

J1 TP2 TP3

TP4

R8

R9

Q1 U1

Q3

Q4

Q2 TP1

1 1 1

J1

Q2

J2 J3R27

R30

R28 R29

Page 339: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–5

Catalyst Heater Control Card

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD After the side panels are removed, high voltage is present. Use caution when making these adjustments. Contact with voltages inside the instrument can be lethal or cause serious injury.

• This procedure adjusts the catalyst heater control card to ensure proper temperature tracking of the catalyst heater and to provide an accurate temperature read-out on the ambient monitor.

• This adjustment is only necessary when the catalyst heater card or heating element is replaced.

• To properly perform this adjustment, a digital voltmeter capable of measuring 7 volts is needed. Also, a calibrated thermocouple is necessary to externally measure the operating temperature of the catalyst heater.

1. Turn the analysis gas OFF.

2. Remove the left side panel of the unit to access the catalyst heater controller card.

3. Attach the negative terminal of the digital voltmeter to the metal chassis of the determinator where there is no paint. Be sure a good connection is made.

4. Attach the positive lead to pin 4 of connector J078A or pin 7 of U4. Refer to Figure 9-2, page 9–6.

5. Adjust control R16 until 3.5 volts is read on the digital voltmeter. At pin 4 of J078A, one volt equals 100oC.

6. Remove the digital voltmeter leads from the determinator.

7. Using protective gloves, remove the catalyst heater tube from the catalyst heater and set it on a heat-resistant surface.

• To remove the catalyst heater tube refer to page 6–11, steps 3 and 4.

WARNING

Notes

Note

Page 340: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–6 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

8. Install an empty catalyst heater tube into the catalyst heater, and allow ten minutes for the catalyst heater tube to heat. The top of the catalyst heater tube should be left open.

9. Insert a digital thermometer thermocouple into the catalyst heater tube approximately seven inches.

10. Access the ambient monitor and observe the catalyst heater temperature.

11. Adjust control R13 until the temperature displayed on the ambient monitor equals the temperature read on the digital thermometer.

12. Remove the thermocouple and empty catalyst heater tube. Place on a heat-resistant surface.

13. Reinstall the packed catalyst heater tube, and reinstall the top block on the tube.

14. Further adjust R16 as needed until the temperature is 350oC ±10oC.

Figure 9-2 Catalyst Heater Control Card

J078A

J078A

CO

PYR

IGH

T C

19

93A

LL R

IGH

TS R

ESER

VED

LEC

O C

OR

POR

ATIO

NST

. JO

SEPH

, MI

U.S

.A.

+

+

+

+C1 C2

C4

C3

R1

R2R3 C

6

CR

1

U1

J078

C10

C9C

8

R4

R9R8

R11

R10

U4

U4

U2

C11

C7

U3

R13

R13 R16

C12

R14

R15

C13

R16

R12

TB1

R5

R6

C5 R

7

Page 341: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–7

Induction Power Control Card

1. Verify correct installation of vacuum capacitor and oscillator tube in furnace.

2. Turn on the furnace service switch and verify that plate current is approximately 150 mA and grid current is approximately 100 mA on the analyze screen.

3. Turn off the service switch and verify that the plate and grid currents go to zero.

4. Turn the power level control clockwise to the max position.

5. Put a calibration load on the furnace pedestal.

• If the calibration load recommended and calibrated by LECO is not used during adjustment, the performance of this instrument cannot be guaranteed.

6. Press the piston switch on the furnace. The pedestal should rise.

7. Perform either step 7A or step 7B.

A. Enter a weight in the stack. When using this method, the minimum time-out parameter under the analysis method option in the setup screen should be extended to 120 seconds or more to allow ample time to perform the adjustments.

• Be sure to reset the minimum time-out to the original setting after the electronic adjustments have been performed.

B. Move jumper J1 on the card from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3. This will cause the furnace to turn on until the jumper is replaced on pins 1 and 2. Refer to Figure 9-3, page 9–9.

Note

Note

Page 342: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–8 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

8. Verify that turning power level control up and down (located on the front panel) causes the plate current to increase and decrease respectively. Return the power level control to the max position.

• If the power level control adjustments do not seem to affect the power level read-out, adjust R29 down and try adjusting the power level control again.

9. Adjust the overload control (R32) up (approximately 10 turns) to prevent the furnace from going into overload.

10. Adjust the offset control (R29) as follows:

A. If the oscillator current is below 500 mA, adjust R29 counterclockwise until 500 mA of plate current is obtained and then proceed to step 11.

B. If the oscillator is not oscillating, and the plate current is low, turn R29 clockwise until 500 mA of plate current is obtained.

C. With the power control at maximum, adjust R32 counterclockwise until the current overloads. Then gradually adjust R32 clockwise and R29 counterclockwise until the oscillator tube oscillates at 500 mA.

• Sometimes it requires a couple of attempts at this step if the oscillator gets into this mode of oscillation. Once the oscillator is set, it should function normally for the life of the oscillator tube.

11. Adjust the overload control, R32, down until the furnace power trips. Be sure the power has actually tripped and that the power has not merely turned off because the analysis has ended. Verification can be accomplished by observing that LED1 is lighted.

12. Turn the overload control back approximately 11/2 turns to ensure that the furnace will go into overload just above the full-scale current setting of 500mA.

13. Reset the overload by turning the power level control to reset and then back to max. Now the furnace should not go into overload when the power level control is returned to max.

Note

Note

Page 343: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–9

Figure 9-3 Induction Power Control Card

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4

C3

C8

C2

C1

BR1

R5 CR1

R9

R3 R4R

6R

7R

8

R1

R2

R12

R16

R17

R13

R15

R14

R20

R19

R23

R31

R24

R30

R38

R37

R36 R3

5

R34

R28

R22 R21

R18

C4 C5

C7

C10

C16

C11

U1

U3

C6

J112

A

1J1

Q3

Q6

Q8

R25R26

R39 R40

R29

R32

C19

C17

C23

SCR1

R27

Q1 Q2

C13C

R2

C12

Q5

Q7

Q9

C9

Q10Q11

U2

R33

J112

R10 R11

Q4

C15 C14

LED

1

COPYRIGHT C 1995ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

LECO CORPORATIONST. JOSEPH, MI U.S.A

J112C

C22C21

CR3

C18

C20

J112B

J1

R29

R32

LED1

Page 344: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–10 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

Oven Heater Control Card

• This procedure should be completed if the oven temperature falls out of range (48oC ±2oC) as displayed on the ambient monitor, or when replacing the oven heater control card.

• This adjustment requires a digital voltmeter.

1. Remove the left side panel and oven compartment side panel.

2. Locate the oven heater control card. On the card locate control R14, TP1, and TP2. Refer to Figure 9-4 below.

3. Connect the digital voltmeter’s positive lead to TP1, and the negative lead to TP2. The voltage measured will be 100 mV/oC.

4. When readings have stabilized, adjust control R14 for a reading of 4.8 volts.

5. Disconnect the digital voltmeter.

6. Reinstall the side panels.

7. Permit the temperature to stabilize then recheck the temperature reading on the ambient monitor. It should be 48oC ±2oC.

Figure 9-4 Oven Heater Control Card

Notes

CO

PYR

IGH

T

19

97A

LL R

IGH

TS R

ESE

RV

EDLE

CO

CO

RPO

RAT

ION

ST, J

OSE

PH, M

I U.S

.A.

C

J224

C6

C5 C

7

TEM

PTP

3

TP3

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

U2

U3

U4

U5

U1

R7

R10R11

C3

C4

R12

J224

C

J224

B

J224

A

K1

R14

CR

1TP

1TP1

TP2

TP2

R14

GN

D

TEST

R6

R8

C1

C2

R9

Page 345: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Electronic Adjustments CS230 9–11

IR Cell

• The IR cell output range is 7.500 to 9.200 volts. An alarm occurs if the cell exceeds this range, indicating that the following adjustment should be performed.

• J152 is the chopper motor connector for the CO2 IR cell. J152A is the chopper motor connector for the SO2 IR cell. Refer to Figure 9-5, page 9–12.

• This procedure should be repeated for both IR cells.

1. Access the ambient monitor by pressing [5] Diagnostics and then [1] Ambient Monitor. The ambient monitor screen will be displayed.

• The instrument should be at operating temperature, and the gas supply should be on before performing this adjustment.

2. Remove the right side panel of the determinator to access the IR cell oven.

3. Remove the IR cell oven side panel.

4. Locate the zero adjustment control (R24), the gain adjustment control (R3), and the chopper motor connector (J152/J152A).

• The gain adjustment can be made without adjusting the zero adjustment.

• For locations, refer to Figure 9-5, page 9–12.

5. Disconnect the chopper motor connector and observe the display. The reading should drop to zero. If not, adjust the zero control (R24) until the display indicates 0.001 volts.

• Do not adjust to zero.

Notes

Note

Note

Notes

Page 346: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

9–12 CS230 Electronic Adjustments

6. Reconnect the chopper motor connector, and observe the display. The reading should indicate 8.500 ±0.200 volts. If not, adjust the gain adjustment control (R3) until the display indicates 8.500 ±0.200 volts.

• After adjustments are made, permit the oven temperature to stabilize before analyzing samples.

7. Reinstall the side panels.

Figure 9-5 IR Cell Adjustment Location

Note

R3GAIN

J-152CONNECTOR

CO IR CELL2

SO IR CELL2

R24ZERO

ADJUST

R24ZERO

ADJUST

J-152ACONNECTOR

R3GAIN

OVEN HEATERCONTROL CARD

Page 347: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–1

10 10 Service

Illustrations ..................................................................... 10–2 Combustion Pressure Adjustment ....................................... 10–3 Flow Controller Adjustment................................................ 10–5 Safety Pressure Adjustments.............................................. 10–6 Vertical Crucible Alignment ................................................ 10–8 Gas Flows...................................................................... 10–12

Analysis ................................................................... 10–12 Autocleaner .............................................................. 10–15

Valve Control States ....................................................... 10–16 Notices, Errors, and Warnings .......................................... 10–22 Software Upgrade........................................................... 10–26

DSP Software Upgrade Procedure ................................ 10–26 Software Upgrade with Windows® ................................ 10–29

Linearization with DSP..................................................... 10–30 Linearization with Windows® ............................................ 10–32

Service

Page 348: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–2 CS230 Service

Illustrations

Figure 10-1 ....... Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob......... 10–4 Figure 10-2 ....... Flow Controller Location.............................. 10–5 Figure 10-3 ....... Piston Pressure Regulator ........................... 10–7 Figure 10-4 ....... Crucible Alignment..................................... 10–11 Figure 10-5 ....... Gas Flow Diagram...................................... 10–17 Figure 10-6 ....... Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram.............. 10–18 Figure 10-7 ....... Leak Check Flow Diagram ........................... 10–19 Figure 10-8 ....... Leak Check Flow with Autocleaner Diagram ... 10–20 Figure 10-9 ....... Analyze Sequence Diagram ......................... 10–21 Figure 10-10...... EPROM Location......................................... 10–28

Page 349: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–3

Combustion Pressure Adjustment

• The Set Barometer procedure, page 4–27, should be completed before this adjustment is made.

1. Remove the left side panel.

• Use the following procedure for a DSP instrument to turn the gas ON.

A. From the main menu, press [1] Analyze then Menu to display the analysis menu.

B. Press [4] System Controls and set carrier gas to on.

• Use the following procedure for a Windows® instrument to turn the gas ON.

A. Click F10 on the toolbar to turn the gas ON.

2. Using the adjustment knob, adjust the pressure regulator for 12 psi as shown on the pressure gauge. Refer to Figure 10-1, on page 10–4.

3. Replace the left side panel.

Note

Keypad

Windows®

Page 350: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–4 CS230 Service

Figure 10-1 Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob

ADJUSTMENTKNOB

PRESSUREREGULATOR

Page 351: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–5

Flow Controller Adjustment

1. Remove the left side panel to access the IR cell oven. Refer to Figure 11-1, page 11-3.

2. Using a screwdriver, adjust the flow controller assembly through the access hole in the oven directly above the flow controller assembly. Refer to Figure 10-2, below.

3. From the main menu, press [1] Analyze to turn the gas on and then [4] System Controls.

4. Adjust the oxygen flow controller for 3 liters per minute indicated on the determinator's front panel oxygen flow rotameter.

5. Reinstall the IR cell oven side panel and the determinators left side panel.

Figure 10-2 Flow Controller Location

602-454REGULATOR

FLOW CONTROLASSEMBLY

FLOW CONTROLASSEMBLY

ACCESS HOLE

666-224-110OVEN HEATER

CARD782-067-110

SO IR-CELL2

778-574-120CO IR CELL2

Page 352: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–6 CS230 Service

Safety Pressure Adjustments

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD After the left side panel of the unit is removed, high voltage is present. Do not touch any component inside the cabinet when performing this adjustment unless instructed to do so.

• Piston safety pressure (6 psi) is applied to the pneumatic piston except when the piston is fully extended.

• The pneumatic piston closing speed increases as pressure increases.

1. Access the analyze menu and select Manual Operation.

2. Remove the left side panel and locate the piston pressure regulator. Refer to Figure 11-1, page 11-3.

3. Press the up/down switch and open the furnace. Observe the speed of the piston while the piston is in transit. If the piston does not travel from top to bottom and bottom to top in approximately two seconds locate the safety pressure adjustment knob, Figure 10-3, page 10–7 and adjust as follows:

A. If the piston travel is too slow:

1) Cycle the furnace piston by pressing the up/down switch and rotate the safety pressure adjustment knob clockwise while observing the speed of the piston.

2) The time for piston travel should be approximately two seconds.

3) Cycle the furnace piston by pressing the up/down switch twice.

4) The time for piston travel should still be approximately two seconds.

5) Press the up/down switch to close the furnace and complete this procedure.

WARNING

Notes

Page 353: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–7

B. If the piston travel is too fast:

1) Cycle the furnace piston by pressing the up/down switch and rotate the safety pressure adjustment knob counter-clockwise while observing the speed of the piston.

2) The time for piston travel should be approximately two seconds.

3) Cycle the furnace piston by pressing the up/down switch twice.

4) The time for piston travel should still be approximately two seconds.

5) Press the up/down switch to close the furnace and complete this procedure.

FIRE HAZARD Oxygen increases the flammability of materials. Always use caution when adjusting or operating units using oxygen supplies. LECO recommends routine leak check procedures to reduce the possibility of fire hazards.

Figure 10-3 Piston Pressure Regulator

CAUTION

!

Page 354: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–8 CS230 Service

Vertical Crucible Alignment

• To assure efficient lance flow to the sample, and optimal sample coupling, with the high-energy field around the coil, the crucible must be properly positioned on the pedestal.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD The capacitors on the oscillator chassis store a lethal amount of energy and must be discharged to avoid electric shock . Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the oscillator chassis.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD After the power has been turned on, both the oscillator and the furnace power supply produce lethal voltages. Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the oscillator chassis.

1. Place an empty crucible on the furnace pedestal and close the furnace.

2. Observe the crucible position through the furnace screen. The bottom of the crucible should be located just below or even with the lower portion of the third coil turn from the top. Refer to Figure 10-4 page 10–11.

3. If the crucible is not in the proper position, it will be necessary to adjust the induction coil.

A. Place the furnace’s power on/off switch to the off position and unplug the furnace power cord from facility power.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Disconnect from facility power before continuing with this procedure.

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

Note

Page 355: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–9

B. Remove the crucible from the pedestal and the pedestal from the adapter. Set the crucible and pedestal aside. Refer to Figure 10-4, page 10–11.

C. Open the lance access door and remove the lance assembly.

D. Remove the combustion tube and set it aside.

E. Remove the front cover and metal screen to access the induction coil.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD The capacitors on the oscillator chassis store a lethal amount of energy and must be discharged to avoid electric shock . Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the oscillator chassis or touching the induction coil.

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD After the power has been turned on, the oscillator produces lethal voltages. Contact the LECO service department for more information before servicing the oscillator chassis or touching the induction coil.

F. Adjust the induction coil.

POSSIBLE MACHINE ERROR Make sure the spacing between the coil turns remains the same.

WARNING WARNING

WARNING WARNING

CAUTION

!

Page 356: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–10 CS230 Service

1) For very minor adjustments: Carefully grasp the induction coil and bend it into the proper position.

2) For average adjustments:

a) Loosen the two coil collets, Figure 2-5, page 2–13.

b) Move the induction coil until the induction coil is in the proper position.

c) Tighten the coil collets being careful not to over-tighten.

3) For large adjustment:

a) Remove the right side panel.

b) Remove the RF shield.

c) Loosen the four screws holding the oscillator chassis in place.

d) Move the oscillator until the induction coil is in the proper position.

e) Tighten the oscillator chassis screws.

f) Reinstall the RF shield and the right side panel.

G. Replace the combustion tube, lance assembly, metal screen, and front cover.

H. Close the lance access door.

I. Plug the furnace into facility power and place the furnace’s power on/off switch in the on position.

4. When the adjustment is completed, reinstall the pedestal, place an empty crucible on the furnace pedestal, and close the furnace.

5. Observe the crucible position. If the crucible still needs adjustment, repeat step 3 until the crucible is properly aligned.

Page 357: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–11

Figure 10-4 Crucible Alignment

528-018CRUCIBLE605-814

PEDESTALADAPTER

ASSEMBLY605-816

PEDESTAL

EMPTYCRUCIBLE

INDUCTIONCOIL

METALSCREEN FRONT

COVER

LOWER SEALASSEMBLY

Page 358: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–12 CS230 Service

Gas Flows

Analysis

Analyze Valve State—In this valve state, oxygen flows through both the furnace and the determinator system.

When the gas is turned on, oxygen, regulated at 35 psi at its source, enters the determinator through the O2 inlet port on the cabinet back panel. Oxygen flow is then filtered through a 6 inch bubble tube (located on the front of the furnace) containing Lecosorb and anhydrone. Carbon dioxide is removed from the oxygen flow using Lecosorb reagent and moisture is removed in the anhydrone reagent. Oxygen, with all impurities removed, serves as the carrier gas in the system.

After all impurities have been removed from the carrier gas, the flow is divided into two paths; one path, the lance flow, is directed through solenoid valve 3 and into the top of the combustion tube. During an analysis, lance flow is held constant and is directed into the sample to assist carbon-bearing components to convert into CO or CO2. The second path is directed through solenoid valve 5 into the bottom of the combustion tube; this flow rate varies (2 to 3 lpm) in accordance with each valve state.

The carrier gas flows from the combustion tube sweeping released gases from the combustion tube through a screen filter, then through a 4 inch filter tube containing anhydrone to remove water. The carrier gas, regulated by a flow controller in the oven, flows through the catalyst heater. A small percentage of the carbon is present as carbon monoxide, which is converted to carbon dioxide as the gas flows through the platinized silica gel in the heater. Sulfur trioxide is removed in a cellulose trap. Gas then flows through the cellulose trap, CO2 IR cell and solenoid valve 15. It is then exhausted out the back of the unit.

Furnace Open 1 Valve State—In this valve state, the combustion tube is depressurized so that residual dust can be ejected.

Lance flow remains the same as in the analyze valve state, but the measure flow is bypassed through both solenoid valve 9 and solenoid valve 2. Flow through solenoid valve 9 is briefly purged through the combustion chamber while flow from solenoid valve 2 passes through the cellulose trap and IR cell as previously described for the measure flow. Pneumatic gas flows through the safety pressure regulator. With solenoid valve 9 open, the lance and purge flow (through solenoid valve 9) ejects residual dust from the combustion tube.

Page 359: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–13

Furnace Open 2 Valve State—In this valve state, the piston moves down and, if selected, the vacuum turns on.

Lance flow is on while measure flow bypasses the furnace altogether and flows directly through solenoid valve 2 and is directed to the IR cell. Pneumatic gas is switched through the safety pressure regulator and solenoid valve 10 causing the piston to be lowered. In addition, the vacuum solid-state relay switches on if it has been selected.

Furnace Open 3 Valve State—In this valve state, the vacuum, if selected, shuts off and the furnace remains open to load the next crucible on the pedestal.

Flow is identical to Furnace Open 2 Valve State, but the vacuum solid state relay switches the vacuum cleaner off.

Furnace Closed 1 Valve State—This valve state is triggered when a loaded crucible is placed on the piston and the piston up/down key is pressed. The piston moves up under low pressure until the up piston limit switch closes.

Oxygen flow completely bypasses the furnace through solenoid valve 2 and is directed through the cellulose trap and IR cell. Pneumatic gas flows through the safety pressure regulator and closes solenoid valve 10 to move the piston up.

Furnace Closed 2 Valve State—In this valve state, the lower seal changes to high pressure and is sealed against the combustion tube o-ring. Atmospheric gases are quickly purged out of the combustion tube.

Lance flow is on and measure flow is on through the IR cell as well as purged through the top of the combustion tube. Pneumatic gas allows atmospheric gases to be purged from the combustion tube.

Furnace Closed 3 Valve State—After a pre-analyze purge delay, the combustion tube is pressurized in this valve state.

Oxygen flow is identical to that in Furnace Closed 2 Valve State, but pneumatic flow goes through solenoid valve 9 only.

Analysis Valve State—Following Furnace Closed 3 Valve State, there is a 2 second delay, after which the CPU checks that the lance pressure switch is closed and a weight has been entered in the weight stack. If both conditions are affirmative, the system goes into Analyze Valve State, (previously discussed). During a preanalyze delay, a stable IR baseline is obtained, after which IR zeros are taken. Integration begins just before the furnace is heated. As the sample is combusted in the furnace, sample gases are mixed with the carrier gas (oxygen) and CO2 is collected and released by the trap. Then the gas is directed to the IR cell. Percent carbon is displayed on screen, the furnace shuts off, and the answers are saved in memory and then printed.

Page 360: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–14 CS230 Service

Post-Analyze Valve State—In this valve state, lance flow is shut off while measure flow remains on to maintain a constant flow through the IR detection system.

Lance flow is off, while measure flow is directed into the bottom of the furnace and subsequently through the IR cell. The piston remains raised under pneumatic pressure.

Page 361: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–15

Autocleaner

After a programmed number of analyses, the furnace must be cleaned, either manually or automatically, to prevent excessive residue buildup. The following procedure generally describes both manual and automatic cleaning cycle flows; however, in system controls, several autoclean options can be selected. Refer to the System Controls procedure on page 5–16 and System Configuration on page 4–59, for details.

In each of the three clean valve states, oxygen flow is bypassed through the IR cell, the piston is down, and the door is closed. Differences in these valve states include vacuum cleaner on or off and brush up or down.

A clean cycle is begun by pressing [5] Clean from the analyze menu. If the cup is up, the combustion tube is depressurized (Furnace Open 1 Valve State) and the lance pressure switch opens. If the piston switch is down, Clean 1 Valve State is signaled and the furnace door closes.

If an autocleaner has been installed, the vacuum turns on, the brush moves down (Clean 2 Valve State) and up (Clean 1 Valve State), and then the cycle repeats 2 times. If manually cleaning, the vacuum switch shuts off automatically (Clean 3 Valve State) and the vacuum switch is pressed manually to begin cleaning. After cleaning the filter and combustion tube, the vacuum switch is shut off manually. Then [5] Clean is pressed and the furnace door opens (Furnace Open 3 Valve State).

The cycle is completed when atmospheric gases are purged from the system (gas flows for each valve state have been previously discussed). After cleaning, the vacuum is shut off (Furnace Open 3 Valve State), the clean switch is pressed, and the cup moves up under low pressure (Furnace Closed 1 Valve State). The cup then goes to high pressure, sealing the piston against the o-ring. Atmospheric gases are purged from the combustion tube (Furnace Closed 2 Valve State) and after a purge delay, the combustion tube is pressurized. Finally, after a two second delay, oxygen flows through both the furnace and determinator (Post Analyze Valve State).

Page 362: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–16 CS230 Service

Valve Control States

CS230 O

xyg

en

So

len

oid

Byp

ass

So

len

oid

Lan

ce S

ole

no

id

Fu

rnace

Gas

So

len

oid

Pin

ch V

alv

e S

ole

no

id

Safe

ty S

ole

no

id

Do

ser

So

len

oid

Pu

rge S

ole

no

id

Pis

ton

So

len

oid

Do

or

So

len

oid

Bru

sh S

ole

no

id

Fu

rnace

Co

ntr

ol S

oli

d S

tate

Rela

y*

Vacu

um

Cle

an

er

So

lid

Sta

te R

ela

y*

Baro

metr

ic C

on

tro

l V

alv

e C

lose

d

Baro

metr

ic C

on

tro

l V

alv

e O

pen

Valve State SV1

SV2

SV3

SV4

SV5

SV6

SV7

SV8

SV9

SV10

SV11

SV12

SV13

SV14

SV15

SV16

Gas Off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0

Standby 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Analyze 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Open 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Open 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Open 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Closed 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Closed 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Furnace Closed 3 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Post Analyze 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Leak Check 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Leak Check 2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Leak Check 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Leak Check 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Barometric 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Clean 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

Clean 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

Clean 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

• 1 (One): Indicates the solenoid valve is open.

• 0 (Zero): Indicates the solenoid valve is closed.

* Independent of valve states

Notes

Page 363: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–17

PS

EXHAUST

SV7

2

22 3

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

COIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

SV10

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2NCNO

DOOR SOL.

AUTO CLEANER

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV6NC

NO

NCNO

DOWN

FURNACEBYPASS FLOW

UP

PRESSURESWITCH

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

QUARTZWOOL

MEASURE FLOW

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3

UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

PS

PS

4 PSI

4 PSI

BYPASS BLOCK

Figure 10-5

Gas Flow Diagram

Page 364: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–18 CS230 Service

PS

EXHAUST

SV7

2

22 3

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

COIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

SV10

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2NCNO

DOOR SOL.

AUTO CLEANER

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV6NC

NO

NCNO

DOWN

FURNACEBYPASS FLOW

UP

PRESSURESWITCH

PINCH VALVE

DUSTEJECT

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

QUARTZWOOL

MEASURE FLOW

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3

UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

PS

PS

4 PSI

4 PSI

Figure 10-6

Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram

Page 365: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–19

PS

EXHAUST

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

SOIR

CELLCOIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

INCOMINGPRESSURE

GAUGE

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2C

NC

NO

DOOR SOL. (OPTIONAL)

AUTO CLEANER (OPTIONAL)

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

EXH

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV7

SV10NC

DOWN

UPNO

PRESSURESWITCH

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

2

2

2

3

2

QUARTZWOOL

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

WIRE MESHFILTER

PS

PS4 PSI

4 PSI

LEAK CHECK WITH FURNACE BY-PASSSED

LEAK CHECK ENTIRE SYSTEM

Figure 10-7

Leak Check Flow Diagram

Page 366: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–20 CS230 Service

EXHAUST

BAROMCTRLVALVE

PT

TRANSDUCER &REGULATORASSEMBLY

FM

BAROMPRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

OVEN FLOWCONTROLLER

SOIR

CELLCOIR CELL

SOTRAP

CATALYSTHEATER

PS

PS

PS

LECOSORB/ANHPARTICLE

FILTER

O IN40 PSI

SV1

RESTRICTOR

PRESSUREREGULATOR

SV5

SV10

PRESSURESWITCH

SV9

ANH

SV2NCNO

DOOR SOL. (OPTIONAL)

AUTO CLEANER (OPTIONAL)

SV11

SV12

NC

NC

NO

NO

SAFETYPRESSURE

REGULATOR

SV7

SV6NC

NO

NCNO

DOWN

FURNACE

BYPASS FLOW

UP

PRESSURESWITCH

PINCH VALVE

DUSTEJECT

PNEUMATICPRESSURE

40 PSIPARTICLE

FILTER

25 PSI

2

2

2

3

2

QUARTZWOOL

MEASURE FLOW

MEASUREFLOW

ROTAMETER

CELLULOSEFILTER

RESTRICTOR

SV3

UPSTREAMPRESSURE

GUAGE

PRESSURESWITCH

PS

LEAK CHECK WITH FURNACE BY-PASSED

LEAK CHECK ENTIRE SYSTEM

4 PSI

4 PSI

PS

Figure 10-8

Leak Check Flow with Autocleaner Diagram

Page 367: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–21

Figure 10-9 Analyze Sequence Diagram

HA

S SA

MPL

EW

EIG

HT

BEE

NEN

TER

ED?

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES YE

S

YES

YES

YES

AN

ALY

ZEV5

MEA

SUR

ED F

LOW

BY-

PASS

ES F

UR

NA

CE.

TUB

E D

EPR

ESSU

RIZ

ED.

SOM

E D

UST

PU

RG

EDTH

RU

PIN

CH

VA

LVE.

PIST

ON

CO

NTR

OL

FUR

NA

CE

OPE

N1

VALV

E ST

ATE

NO

NO

YES

DEL

AY1

SEC

ON

D

CU

P M

OVE

S D

OW

N

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES YE

S

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

HAV

E3

SEC

ON

DS

ELA

PSED

PIST

ON

DO

WN

LIM

ITSW

ITC

H?

LOA

D C

RU

CIB

LEA

ND

SA

MPL

E

PIST

ON

CO

NTR

OL

NO

NO

PIST

ON

UP

LIM

ITSW

ITC

H

PRE-

AN

ALY

ZEPU

RG

E D

ELAY

DEL

AY2

SEC

ON

DS

NO NO

AN

ALY

ZEVA

LVE

STAT

E

CH

ECK

CO

MB

UST

ION

PRES

SUR

E57

5L=P

RES

S=6

25

NO

NO

WA

RN

ING

CO

MB

UST

ION

PRES

SUR

E

IR C

ELL

OU

T O

F R

AN

GE

750m

V<

IR <

950

0mV

RA

NG

E

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

MO

NIT

OR

GR

ID &

PLA

TEC

UR

REN

T

LOW

PLA

TEC

UR

REN

TO

RLO

W G

RID

CU

RR

ENT

TUR

NG

AS

ON

OPR

ESSU

RE

25 P

SI2

+ +N

O P

NEU

MAT

ICPR

ESSU

RE

PNEU

MAT

ICPR

ESSU

RE

25 P

SI

O F

LOW

TH

RU

FUR

NA

CE

AN

DA

NA

LYTI

CA

L SY

STEM

2

LAN

CE

PRES

SUR

ESW

ITC

HO

PEN

?

HAV

E2

SEC

ON

DS

ELA

PSED

?

DU

ST C

LOG

INFL

OW

SYS

TEM

FUR

NA

CE

OPE

N3

VALV

E ST

ATE

NO

PIS

TON

DO

WN

LIM

IT S

WIT

CH

FUR

NA

CE

CLO

SED

1VA

LVE

STAT

E

CU

P M

OVE

S U

PU

ND

ER L

OW

PR

ESSU

RE

NO

PIS

TON

UP

LIM

IT S

WIT

CH

FUR

NA

CE

CLO

SED

2VA

LVE

STAT

E

CU

P C

HA

NG

ES T

OH

IGH

PR

ESSU

RE.

PUR

GE

ATM

OSP

HER

ICG

ASE

S O

UT

OF

CO

MB

UST

ION

TU

BE.

EDIT

AB

LE T

HR

UA

NA

LYSI

S M

ETH

OD

FUR

NA

CE

CLO

SED

3VA

LVE

STAT

E

CO

MB

UST

ION

TU

BE

IS P

UR

GED

AN

DPR

ESSU

RIZ

ED

NO

CO

MB

UST

ION

TUB

E PR

ESSU

RE

O F

LOW

THR

U F

UR

NA

CE

AN

D A

NA

LYTI

CA

LSY

STEM

2

LAN

CE

PRES

SUR

ESW

ITC

HC

LOSE

D?

ENTE

R

WEI

GH

T

PRE-

AN

ALY

ZED

ELAY

EDIT

AB

LE T

HR

UA

NA

LYSI

S M

ETH

OD

ALL

ATM

OSP

HER

IC G

ASE

SPU

RG

ED F

RO

M S

YSTE

M.

WA

ITIN

G F

OR

GO

OD

STA

BLE

IR B

ASE

LIN

E.

TAK

EIR

ZER

OS

STA

RT

INTE

GR

ATIO

N

FUR

NA

CE

ON

LIVE

AN

SWER

DIS

PLAY

MO

NIT

OR

GR

IDA

ND

PLAT

E C

UR

REN

T

MIN

IMU

MC

AR

BO

NTI

ME

?

MIN

IMU

MSU

LFU

RTI

ME

?

CA

RB

ON

CO

MPA

RAT

OR

LEVE

L?

SULF

UR

CO

MPA

RAT

OR

LEVE

L?

DIS

PLAY

CA

RB

ON

AN

SWER

DIS

PLAY

SULF

UR

AN

SWER

FUR

NA

CE

OFF

SAVE

AN

DPR

INT

AN

SWER

S

POST

AN

ALY

ZEVA

LVE

STAT

ELA

NC

E FL

OW

IS O

FF

HAV

E5

SEC

ON

DS

ELA

PSED

?

Page 368: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–22 CS230 Service

Notices, Errors, and Warnings

Notices

Message Cause Probable Solution

Data Transmit Port Disabled

Data transmit option is disabled.

Select transmit options from the setup menu and enable data transmit.

No Results Available No results are stored in result list.

Run analysis to obtain results.

No Results Selected No results selected from the result list.

Select results before performing procedure.

No Weights Entered No weights have been entered into the weight stack.

Enter weights into the weight stack.

Password Mismatch The incorrect password was entered.

Enter the correct password.

Printer Not Ready Printer is not turned on, on-line, or connected.

Make sure the printer is turned on, on-line, and connected.

Reset Memory

Appears when memory reset is selected from a menu or when a software update is performed.

Either reset memory by pressing Yes or abort and do not reset memory by pressing No.

Sample Weight Out Of Range

Sample weight exceeded limits of reasonable value.

Enter correct sample weight.

Page 369: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–23

Warnings

Message Cause Probable Solution

Clean Dust Filter Clean counter limit reached.

Clean the dust filter, either manually or automatically.

Combustion Pressure Pressure outside of 575mm to 625mm range.

Perform a combustion pressure adjustment.

Low Plate Current Or Low Grid Current

Plate current drops below 200mA causing poor coupling or grid current drops below 50mA causing weak oscillator tube.

Add accelerator or iron chip depending on sample. Replace oscillator tube. Replace lance flow restrictor.

Page 370: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–24 CS230 Service

Errors

Message Cause Probable Solution

Balance Port Open Failure Balance port will not initialize.

Hardware problem. Contact the LECO service department.

Blank Out Of Range [Element Name]

Blank result range of ~ 1% exceeded. Incorrect blank results selected.

Select correct blank results from results list.

Calibration Out Of Range [Element Name]

Calibration results out of range, .01 to 10. Incorrect calibration results selected.

Select correct calibration results from results list.

Data Transmit [Port Disabled, Buffer Is Full, Buffer Is Empty, String Is Too Long, Not Enough Room]

Data transmit port inoperative.

Hardware problem. Contact the LECO service department.

Dust Clog In Flow System Dust filter is dirty. Clean dust filter.

IR Cell Out Of Range IR cell voltage exceeds range limits.

Access the ambient monitor to determine the IR cell voltage output. Refer to the IR Cell procedure (page 9-11) to adjust IR cell output voltage.

No Brush Down Limit Switch

Cleaning brush did not reach the fully extended position during cleaning.

Check the lance flow path in the center of the brush for clogging. Turn pneumatic pressure on and off and check for possible jam-up.

No Brush Up Limit Switch Cleaning brush did not reach fully retracted position during cleaning.

Check the lance flow path in the center of the brush for clogging. Turn pneumatic pressure on and off and check for possible jam-up.

No Combustion Tube Pressure

Combustion system cannot pressurize.

Gross leak in combustion system. Check furnace o-rings and outer combustion tube for possible cracks.

Page 371: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–25

Message Cause Probable Solution

No Door Open Limit Switch

Door did not retract after cleaning cycle.

Turn pneumatic pressure off and then on. Check for door jam.

No Oxygen Pressure Pressure loss from oxygen supply or pressure is less than 25 psi.

Check oxygen supply and supply lines. Check oxygen regulator.

No Piston Up Limit Switch Piston did not raise crucible to the up position.

Check pneumatic pressure. Check to see if crucible is jammed.

No Pneumatic Pressure Pneumatic pressure is turned off or gas bottle is empty.

Check and determine if gas supply is turned off. Replace gas bottle.

Transmit Port Open Failure

Transmit port will not initialize.

Hardware problem. Contact the LECO service department.

Unable To Pressurize

Pneumatic supply is turned off. Possible gross leak in system.

Determine that pneumatic supply is turned on. Perform a leak check and check for leaks. Bypass furnace. Check o-rings. Look for a cracked combustion tube.

Page 372: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–26 CS230 Service

Software Upgrade

A major portion of the determinator's functions are defined and controlled by a software program that may be updated. Most updates do not affect the physical design of the determinator, but can improve performance and make operation easier. Therefore, an identification system for program changes called 'Program Version' is used in the CS230 Carbon and Sulfur Determinator and other LECO instruments.

A three-digit number identifies program version levels. The first generation of a program is version '1.00'. Each time a program is changed, the version number is increased.

• The following procedure is for DSP instruments. For Windows® instruments refer to Software Upgrade with Windows® on page 10–29.

DSP Software Upgrade Procedure

• When installing new EPROMs, be careful not to bend any of the EPROM pins out of the socket or under the EPROM.

1. Place the determinator's power on/off switch in the off position and disconnect from facility power.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD The CS230 operates from 230V~. Contact with this voltage can be lethal. Disconnect the determinator from the facility power source before removing the side panels.

Keypad

Note

WARNING

Page 373: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–27

2. Remove the left side panel of the determinator to expose the CPU circuit board. Refer to Figure 10-10, page 10–28.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD After the side panel is removed high voltage is present. Use caution when making these adjustments. Contact with voltages inside the instrument can be lethal or cause serious injury.

3. Locate the program EPROMs IC3 and IC4. With a small flat tip screwdriver, pry the old EPROMs from their sockets. Discard the EPROMs.

4. Install the new program EPROMs in sockets IC3 and IC4. Install the low EPROM in socket IC4 and the high EPROM in socket IC3.

• Make sure the notch at the end of the EPROM is located over the half circle screened on the CPU circuit board.

5. Reinstall the left side panel of the determinator.

6. Turn the AC power on. The Copyright screen should be displayed.

7. After approximately 10 seconds the Reset Confirmation screen will be displayed. Answer Yes to all questions. All system parameters will be set to their factory default values.

8. If desired, enter the old system parameter values printed from System Parameters. The barometric pressure should be set.

9. Proceed with setup and operation of the determinator.

Note

WARNING

Page 374: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–28 CS230 Service

+ +

+ +

+

+

+

+

++

CO

PYRIG

HT C 1994-95

ALL R

IGH

TS RESER

VEDLEC

O C

OR

PORATIO

NST. JO

SEPH

, MI U. S

. A.

++

+ +

++

+

+

+

+

+

+ + +C

1

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C2

U1

IC3

IC4

PD1

PD

2PD

1APD

2AJ859AU

2U

3PD

5

PD

9

C9

C12

C11

Y1

C10

RN

1

U4

U5

C13

C16

C14

C15

113

J859B

J859CJ859D

J859E

J859F

J859G

J859J

J859L

J859NJ859H

R1R

2 R3R

4

C18

U8

U7

U6

U20

U21

U22

U23

U24

U18

U17

U19

C17

IC9

C124 R

5

Q1

R6C

19

C43

C42

C41

U25

U26

C65

C64

C63

C62

C99

C102

C103

C104

C101

C105

C100

TP5

TP6TP7

PD7

C94

C93

C92

C91

U43

U40

U41

U42

SW1

U48

U47

C120

C119

11 1 1

11

11

Y2

Y3L1

C36C37C38C39C40

C95

C96

C97

C98

R27

R26

R25

R24

C33

C34C35

C61

C60

C32

C31

C30

RN

2

R34

R35R36R37R38R39R40R41

U46

U45

U44

C118

C117

C116

C115

C90IC

39U

39

15

U38

U36

191

A32 A1B32 B1C32 C1

TP1TP2TP

3

J859I

C66

C59

C58

C56

R8

R9

R10

R11

R12

R43C28C

R4

C29

U15PD

6

C27

J1

PD4

U13

U11

U10

U9

CR

3

R42

C25

C26

C123

C22

C20

C21

C23

C24

R7

C44

C46

C45

U12

U14

U16

U29

U30

U31

C50

R17

R18

C49

R13

C55

C51C52C53

C54

C57

R19R20R21R22R23

U35

U37

C89

C85

C87

C88

C86

PD8

U34

U33

U32C

111

C113

C114

J859K C112 C81

C84C83C82 C

80 C78

C77

C76

C75 C74

C79

CR

1

CR

2C

122C

121

C109C

110

C108

C107

C106

C73

R30 R16 R15R14

C48

C47

R32

R31 C70

R28

C69

C68

C67

R29U

28

U27

R33

C72

C71

J859H

19 1

1

PD3

CPU BOARD

IC3

IC4

Figure 10-10 EPROM Location

Page 375: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–29

Software Upgrade with Windows®

• The following information is for Windows® instruments. For DSP instruments refer to DSP Software Upgrade Procedure on page 10–26.

1. With the computer on, place the software update disk in the CDROM drive.

2. Click on the Start button in the lower left-hand corner of the desktop.

3. Click Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter D:\Setup.exe and click OK.

5. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.

6. If desired, enter the old system parameters. The time and barometric pressure should be set.

7. Proceed with setup and operation of the determinator.

Windows®

Page 376: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–30 CS230 Service

Linearization with DSP

• The following procedure is for DSP instruments. For Windows® instruments refer to Linearization on page 10–32.

• To optimize linearity of the detection system, break and slope values are employed.

• The break and slope values to enter are found on the linearization tag attached to the IR cell.

• The break and slope values were entered during the manufacturing process, new values should be entered only if the IR cell is replaced, the version of software is updated or the system has been reset.

1. Access linearization by choosing [9] More then [2] Linearization from the setup menu.

• Linearization permits the operator to enter the break and slope values that were determined during the manufacturing process.

Notes

Note

Carbon

# Break Adj Bk Slope 0 0 1.0000 0 565 565 1.0466 1 1101 1125 1.0381 2 2258 2326 1.0299 3 3785 3898 1.0534 4 6424 6677 1.0348 5 9261 9612 1.0344 6 12414 12873 1.0822 7 16063 16821 1.0921 8 18503 19493 1.1001 9 20584 21776 Range: 0 - 52000

Keypad

Page 377: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–31

2. Press Select or Next to move the cursor to the next line.

3. Press Previous to move the cursor back one line.

4. Press the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor and edit a digit using the keypad.

5. Press Menu to access the print command. If a copy of the linearization is desired, press [1] Print from the menu.

6. After all break and slope values have been entered, press Exit to return to the setup menu. The determinator will calculate the adjusted break value.

Page 378: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–32 CS230 Service

Linearization with Windows®

• The following information is for Windows® instruments. For DSP instruments refer to Linearization on page 10–30.

The output signal (voltage) from the IR cell detector is not linear with respect to element concentration. To make the output of the IR cell appear linear, each cell is linearized by LECO during the manufacturing process.

• It is only necessary to perform this procedure if an IR cell is replaced. The break and slope values to enter during this procedure can be found on a tag attached to the replacement IR cell.

1. Click Configuration and select Linearizations. The linearization dialog box will appear.

Note

Windows®

Page 379: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Service CS230 10–33

2. Click the arrow in the Select Cell drop down box and select the IR cell to linearize. Selections are Carbon Low Range, Carbon High Range or Sulfur.

3. Click on the table and enter the break and slope values. The determinator will calculate the adjusted break value.

4. Click OK to save the adjusted break value and exit this procedure.

Page 380: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

10–34 CS230 Service

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 381: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–1

11 11 Illustrations

Figure 11-1 ....... Display Assembly....................................... 11–2 Figure 11-2 ....... Gas Panel Assembly ................................... 11–3 Figure 11-3 ....... Head Filter and Lance Assembly................... 11–4 Figure 11-4 ....... Dust Door Assembly................................... 11–5 Figure 11-5 ....... Power Supply Assembly .............................. 11–6 Figure 11-6 ....... Transformer Assembly................................ 11–7 Figure 11-7 ....... Flow Controller Assembly ............................ 11–8 Figure 11-8 ....... Oscillator Assembly.................................... 11–9 Figure 11-9 ....... Pinch Valve Assembly ................................. 11–10 Figure 11-10...... Quick Loader Pneumatic Manifold ................. 11–11 Figure 11-11...... Carousel Assembly..................................... 11–12 Figure 11-12...... Quick Feeder Arm Assembly ........................ 11–13 Figure 11-13...... Carousel Assembly..................................... 11–14 Figure 11-14...... Quick Feeder Arm Assembly ........................ 11–15 Figure 11-15...... Autocleaner Assembly ................................ 11–17 Figure 11-16...... Quick Loader Assembly............................... 11–18 Figure 11-17...... Quick Feeder Assembly............................... 11–19

Illustrations

Page 382: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–2 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-1

Display Assembly

Page 383: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–3

Figure 11-2

Gas Panel Assembly

Page 384: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–4 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-3

Head Filter and Lance Assembly

Page 385: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–5

Figure 11-4

Dust Door Assembly

Page 386: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–6 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-5

Power Supply Assembly

Page 387: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–7

Figure 11-6

Transformer Assembly

Page 388: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–8 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-7

Flow Controller Assembly

Page 389: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–9

Figure 11-8

Oscillator Assembly

Page 390: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–10 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-9

Pinch Valve Assembly

Page 391: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–11

Figure 11-10

Quick Loader Pneumatic Manifold

Page 392: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–12 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-11

Carousel Assembly

Page 393: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–13

Figure 11-12

Quick Feeder Arm Assembly

Page 394: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–14 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-13

Carousel Assembly

Page 395: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–15

Figure 11-14

Quick Feeder Arm Assembly

Page 396: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–16 CS230 Illustrations

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 397: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–17

Figure 11-15

Autocleaner Assembly

Page 398: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–18 CS230 Illustrations

Figure 11-16

Quick Loader Assembly

Page 399: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Illustrations CS230 11–19

Figure 11-17

Quick Feeder Assembly

Page 400: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

11–20 CS230 Illustrations

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 401: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Schematics CS230 12–1

12 12 Schematics

Schematics

Page 402: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

12–2 CS230 Schematics

Page 403: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Schematics CS230 12–3

Page 404: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

12–4 CS230 Schematics

Page 405: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Schematics CS230 12–5

Page 406: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

12–6 CS230 Schematics

Page 407: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Schematics CS230 12–7

Page 408: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

12–8 CS230 Schematics

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 409: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–1

13 13 Index

A

Abort ......................................................................... 5–55

About the Examples ..................................................... 4–10

After Use, what to do .....................................................5–8

Ambient Monitor.......................................................... 4–16

Ambient Monitor Definitions ...................................8–7, 8–24

Ambient Monitor Ranges............................................... 8–25

Ambient Monitor, DSP ....................................................8–5

Ambient Monitor, Windows............................................ 8–22

Ambients.................................................................... 5–61

Analysis Gas Flow States ............................................ 10–12

Analysis Menu Definitions and Ranges ............................ 5–17

Analysis Method Menu.................................................. 4–32

Analysis Row .............................................................. 5–54

Analysis Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis ........................ 10–13

Analyze...................................................................... 5–55

Analyze a Sample ............................................... 5–25, 5–68

Analyze Menu ............................................................. 5–11

Analyze Sequence Diagram......................................... 10–21

Analyze Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis......................... 10–12

Anhydrone....................................................................6–4

Anhydrone Tube...................................................2–14, 6–4

ASCII Character Definition Table.................................... 4–36

Auto Widths................................................................ 5–60

Autocleaner .........................................................3–12, 6–6

Autocleaner Assembly ....................................................6–7

Autocleaner Gas Flow States ....................................... 10–15

Autocleaner Mesh Filter ..................................................6–9

Autocleaner O-rings ..................................................... 6–10

Index

Page 410: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–2 CS230 Index

Automatically Transmit Analysis Results.......................... 4–44

Average, Statistics....................................................... 5–44

B

Balance...............................................................3–3, 5–55

Balance Configuration Definitions................................... 4–62

Balance Definitions ...................................................... 4–62

Balance Installation .......................................................3–3

Balance Interfacing........................................................3–4

Balance Login ............................................................. 5–66

Balance Options .......................................................... 4–23

Balance Tab................................................................ 4–61

Balance Weight ........................................................... 5–20

Balance Weight, Analyze Menu ...................................... 5–20

Balance, Resetting the ...................................................3–5

Balance, Setting the Data Output Parameter .....................3–5

Barometric (PID) Pressure Regulator Adjustment ...............9–3

Barometric Pressure..................................................... 4–63

Blank......................................................................... 5–58

Blank Calibration ......................................................... 5–77

Blank Samples ............................................................ 5–10

Blank Samples defined ................................................. 5–10

Buffer, Plot ................................................................. 8–13

Buffer, Print................................................................ 8–12

C

Calculate Blank ........................................................... 5–33

Calculate Calibration .................................................... 5–30

Calibrate Menu............................................................ 5–27

Calibration.................................................................. 5–76

Calibration Format ....................................................... 5–28

Calibration Results Format Selection............................... 5–28

Calibrations ................................................................ 5–58

Catalyst Heater Control Card...........................................9–5

Catalyst Heater Tube Packing ........................................ 6–11

Caution, Operator........................................................ 1–11

Cellulose Filter ............................................................ 6–13

Page 411: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–3

Change Password ........................................................ 4–31

Clean Switch............................................................... 5–18

Clean Switch without Autocleaner .................................. 5–19

Clean Switch, Analyze Menu.......................................... 5–18

Clean Swith with Autocleaner ........................................ 5–18

Clear Selection............................................................ 5–29

Clear Selection, Calibration Menu................................... 5–29

Clear Selections .......................................................... 5–41

Clear Selections, Results Menu ...................................... 5–41

Clipboard Use ............................................................. 5–97

Combustion Pressure ................................................... 4–28

Combustion Pressure Adjustment................................... 10–3

Combustion Pressure Adjustment Knob, Illustration.......... 4–28

Combustion Tube ........................................................ 6–15

Combustion Tube Cleaning............................................ 6–15

Combustion Tube Installation ........................................ 2–18

Combustion Zone O-Rings ............................................ 6–16

Communication Settings............................................... 4–68

Comparator .........................................................4–55, 7–8

Comparator Level ..........................................................7–8

Components and Accessories List................................... 1–26

Comport............................................................ 5–61, 8–28

Computer Installation................................................... 2–25

Configuration Menu...................................................... 5–58

Configure Element Definitions........................................ 4–52

Configure Maintenance Counters.................................... 4–46

Configure Result Plot.................................................... 5–98

Configure the Analysis Report........................................ 4–48

Configure the Screen ................................................... 4–50

Configure the Spreadsheet............................................ 4–51

Confirmation............................................................... 4–14

Controls and Indicators .........................................4–6, 4–42

Copy................................................................. 5–53, 5–97

Copyright Screen......................................................... 4–14

Counters .................................................................... 5–59

Crucible Alignment....................................................... 10–8

Page 412: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–4 CS230 Index

Crucibles ......................................................................5–9

Cut................................................................... 5–53, 5–97

D

Data Management ....................................................... 5–83

Data Transmit ............................................................. 4–35

Data Transmit Format .................................................. 4–37

Declaration of Conformity ............................................. 1–15

Define Delimiters......................................................... 4–66

Define Fields............................................................... 4–64

Defining, Quick Access Menu ......................................... 4–30

Definitions and Ranges, Analyze Menu............................ 5–17

Definitions and Selections, Balance Options..................... 4–25

Definitions, Leak Check ................................................ 8–11

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults, Analysis Method Menu .. 4–34

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults, System Options ........... 4–20

Definitions, Ranges, and Defaults, Transmit Options ......... 4–22

Definitions, Statistics ................................................... 5–44

Delete........................................................................ 5–57

Delete a Sample.......................................................... 5–71

Delete Selected Results ................................................ 5–42

Delete Weight ............................................................. 5–13

Delete Weight, Analyze Menu ........................................ 5–13

Delimiters .................................................................. 4–66

Deskjet (Inkjet) Printer ................................................ 3–11

Diagnostics for DSP .......................................................8–1

Diagnostics for Windows............................................... 8–17

Diagnostics Menu ........................................................ 5–61

Diagnostics Procedure, DSP ............................................8–4

Diagnostics, Comport ................................................... 8–28

Diagnostics, Solenoid Valves ......................................... 8–27

Display ...................................................................... 5–60

Dot Matrix Printer ..........................................................3–7

Drift .......................................................................... 5–58

Drift Correction ........................................................... 5–81

DSP Analyze Menu....................................................... 5–11

Page 413: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–5

DSP Diagnostics ............................................................8–1

DSP Operation ..............................................................5–1

DSP Screen Description ................................................ 5–11

DSP Software Upgrade Procedure ................................ 10–26

DSP System Setup.........................................................4–1

Dust Removal Kit......................................................... 3–12

E

Edit Blank, Calibration Menu ......................................... 5–35

Edit Calibration ........................................................... 5–32

Edit Menu................................................................... 5–53

Enter Sample Weight ................................................... 5–23

Enter Standards .......................................................... 4–57

Error Messages ......................................................... 10–24

Errors ...................................................................... 10–24

Exit ........................................................................... 5–52

F

Facility Requirements.....................................................2–6

Facility Voltage Selection .............................................. 2–10

Fields......................................................................... 4–64

File Menu ................................................................... 5–52

Fill............................................................................. 5–53

Fill Selected Cells with the Same Values.......................... 5–84

Filter, Cellulose ........................................................... 6–13

Filter, Lance Assembly.................................................. 6–19

First Row.................................................................... 5–54

Flow Controller Adjustment ........................................... 10–5

Format Results............................................................ 5–40

Furnace Closed 1 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis............ 10–13

Furnace Closed 2 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis............ 10–13

Furnace Closed 3 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis............ 10–13

Furnace Open 1 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis ............. 10–12

Furnace Open 2 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis ............. 10–13

Furnace Open 3 Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis ............. 10–13

G

Gas Connections.......................................................... 2–21

Page 414: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–6 CS230 Index

Gas Flow Diagram .............................................. 7–6, 10–17

Gas Flow States ........................................................ 10–12

Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram ...................... 7–7, 10–18

General Information, Theory of Operation .........................7–3

Gudelines Before an Analysis...........................................5–7

Guidelines After an Analysis ............................................5–8

Guidelines for Operation .................................................5–6

H

Hardware Calibration ................................................... 4–63

Hardware Calibrations .................................................. 5–60

High Sulfur Samples .................................................... 5–10

I

Illustrations List ............................................................1–8

Incoming Reagent Tube....................................... 2–16, 6–17

Induction Power Control Card Adjustment .........................9–7

Infrared Radiation, Absorption, and Detection....................7–4

Insert ........................................................................ 5–53

Insert a Sample Out-of-Sequence .................................. 5–84

Insert Data into the Spreadsheet ................................... 5–83

Insert Weight.............................................................. 5–14

Insert Weight, Analyze Menu......................................... 5–14

Installation of Optional Kits for the Autocleaner................ 3–12

Instrument Installation...................................................2–3

Interference to Other Devices........................................ 1–14

International Installation ................................................2–7

IR Cell Adjustment....................................................... 9–11

K

Keypad ...................................................................... 4–11

L

Lance and Filter Assembly............................................. 6–19

Language .......................................................... 4–73, 5–60

Last Row .................................................................... 5–54

Leak Check................................................................. 5–61

Leak Check Definitions ........................................ 8–11, 8–21

Leak Check Gas Flow Diagram..................................... 10–19

Page 415: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–7

Leak Check Gas Flow with Autocleaner Diagram............. 10–20

Leak Check Procedure, DSP .......................................... 8–10

Leak Check Procedure, Windows.................................... 8–19

Linearization with DSP................................................ 10–30

Linearization with Windows ......................................... 10–32

Linearizations.............................................................. 5–59

Log File ...................................................................... 5–62

Log File, View ............................................................. 6–25

Login ................................................................ 5–55, 5–62

Login a Sample ........................................................... 5–63

Login Periodic Maintenance ........................................... 6–24

Login using a Sample Template ..................................... 5–67

Login, Balance ............................................................ 5–66

M

Main Menu Overview.................................................... 4–15

Maintenance .................................................................6–3

Maintenance Counters, Reset ........................................ 6–26

Maintenance Menu....................................................... 5–62

Maintenance Schedule....................................................6–3

Major Equipment ......................................................... 1–17

Memory, Reset............................................................ 8–16

Menu Organization Chart ................................................4–8

Menu,Calibrate DSP ..................................................... 5–27

Menus............................................................... 4–10, 5–52

Mesh Filter, Autocleaner .................................................6–9

Method ...................................................................... 4–53

Method Development ................................................... 4–53

Method Parameter Definitions........................................ 4–55

Methods..................................................................... 5–59

N

Notice, Operator.......................................................... 1–11

Notices .................................................................... 10–22

Notices and Errors ....................................................... 4–13

Notices, Errors, and Warnings ..................................... 10–22

Page 416: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–8 CS230 Index

O

Operation for DSP..........................................................5–1

Operation for Windows ................................................. 5–47

Operation Guidelines......................................................5–6

Operation, Quick Access Menu....................................... 4–29

Optional Equipment ..................................................... 1–33

Options ...................................................................... 1–33

O-rings, Autocleaner .................................................... 6–10

O-rings, Combustion .................................................... 6–16

Oscillator Tube ............................................................ 2–12

Oven Heater Control Card Adjustment ............................ 9–10

P

Packing, Anhydrone Tube ......................................2–14, 6–4

Packing, Cellulose Filter................................................ 6–13

Packing, Incoming Reagent Tube .......................... 2–16, 6–17

Paste ................................................................ 5–53, 5–97

Pedestal Installation..................................................... 2–26

Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................6–3

Periodic Maintenance, Login .......................................... 6–24

Pinch Valve Assembly, Illustration.................................. 6–22

Pinch Valve Tubing ...................................................... 6–21

Plot Buffer .................................................................. 8–13

Plot Configuration........................................................ 5–98

Points, Statistics.......................................................... 5–44

Post-Analyze Valve State, Gas Flow Analysis.................. 10–14

Power Adjustment, Induction ..........................................9–7

Power-Up ................................................................... 4–10

Prepare the Sample for Analysis .................................... 5–10

Preview Transmitted Data............................................. 4–71

Print .......................................................................... 5–52

Print Buffer................................................................. 8–12

Print Preview .............................................................. 5–52

Print Sample Results .................................................... 5–72

Print Selected Results .................................................. 5–45

Print Setup ................................................................. 5–52

Page 417: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–9

Print System Parameters .............................................. 8–15

Print Weights .............................................................. 5–15

Print Weights, Analyze Menu ......................................... 5–15

Printer .........................................................................3–7

Printer, Settings .......................................................... 3–10

Q

Quick Access Menu ...................................................... 4–29

R

Reagent Tube Screen Filter ........................................... 6–23

Reagent Tube, Incoming............................................... 6–17

Recalculate................................................................. 5–56

Recalculate Result ....................................................... 5–75

Recalculate Results, Calibration Menu............................. 5–36

Relative Standard Deviation, Statistics............................ 5–44

Removal, Anhydrone Tube .....................................2–14, 6–4

Removal, Cellulose Filter .............................................. 6–13

Removal, Incoming Reagent Tube......................... 2–16, 6–17

Reset Maintenance Counters ......................................... 6–26

Reset Memory............................................................. 8–16

Resetting the Balance ....................................................3–5

Result Plot Menu ......................................................... 5–98

Result, Recalculate ...................................................... 5–75

Results Format Selection .............................................. 5–40

Results Menu .............................................................. 5–38

Results, Transmit ........................................................ 5–74

S

Safety Pressure Adjustments......................................... 10–6

Sample ...................................................................... 5–68

Sample Analysis ................................................. 5–25, 5–68

Sample Login.............................................................. 5–63

Sample Login Definitions .............................................. 5–65

Sample Preparation ..................................................... 5–10

Sample Results, Print ................................................... 5–72

Sample Size................................................................ 5–10

Sample Template, Login ............................................... 5–67

Page 418: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–10 CS230 Index

Sample Templates .............................................. 4–56, 5–59

Sample Weight Entry ................................................... 5–23

Samples Menu ............................................................ 5–55

Screen Description, Analyze Menu.................................. 5–11

Screen Filter ............................................................... 6–23

Select First Row in the Spreadsheet ............................... 5–85

Select Language................................................. 4–73, 5–60

Select Last Row in the Spreadsheet................................ 5–85

Select Method ............................................................. 5–22

Select Method, Analyze Menu ........................................ 5–22

Select the Analysis Row in the Spreadsheet..................... 5–85

Set Barometer ............................................................ 4–27

Setting the Data Output Parameter, Balance .....................3–5

Shutdown After Use .......................................................5–8

Software Upgrade Procedure ....................................... 10–26

Solenoid Valve Control States...................................... 10–16

Solenoid Valve States.....................................................8–9

Solenoid Valves,.......................................................... 8–27

Solenoids ................................................................... 5–61

Specifications.............................................................. 1–34

Standard Calibration .................................................... 5–78

Standard Calibration Definitions..................................... 5–80

Standard Deviation, Statistics........................................ 5–44

Standards ......................................................... 4–57, 5–59

Standards Definitions ................................................... 4–58

Statistics .................................................................... 5–43

Statistics Definitions .................................................... 5–44

Statistics, Results Menu................................................ 5–43

Status Bar ......................................................... 4–50, 5–54

Sulfur Samples............................................................ 5–10

Switch States................................................................8–8

Switches ........................................................... 5–61, 8–26

Symbols..................................................................... 1–12

System ...................................................................... 5–59

System Check............................................................. 4–16

System Clock.............................................................. 4–26

Page 419: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

Index CS230 13–11

System Configuration................................................... 4–59

System Configuration Definitions ................................... 4–60

System Controls.......................................................... 5–16

System Controls, Analyze Menu..................................... 5–16

System Options........................................................... 4–19

System Overview ........................................................ 4–15

System Print............................................................... 8–15

System Setup ............................................................. 4–18

System Setup for DSP....................................................4–1

System Setup for Windows ........................................... 4–38

System Tab ................................................................ 4–60

T

Theory of Operation .......................................................7–3

Tool Bar ............................................................ 4–50, 5–54

Transmission Formats ......................................... 4–64, 5–60

Transmit .................................................................... 5–56

Transmit Last.............................................................. 5–21

Transmit Last, Analyze Menu......................................... 5–21

Transmit Options......................................................... 4–21

Transmit Results ......................................................... 5–74

Transmit Selected Results............................................. 5–46

Transmitted Data ........................................................ 4–71

Tubing, Pinch Valve ..................................................... 6–21

U

Users................................................................ 4–74, 5–60

Using the Keypad ........................................................ 4–12

V

Vacuum Cleaner Kit ..................................................... 3–12

Valve Control States .................................................. 10–16

Valve States .................................................................8–9

Vertical Crucible Alignment ........................................... 10–8

View Log File ..................................................... 5–62, 6–25

View Menu.................................................................. 5–54

W

Warnings.................................................................. 10–23

Page 420: Cs 230 Carbon Sulphur

13–12 CS230 Index

Warranty.................................................................... 1–10

Windows Diagnostics.................................................... 8–17

Windows Operation...................................................... 5–47

Windows Sample Analysis ............................................. 5–68

Windows Software Menus ............................................. 5–52

Windows System Configuration...................................... 4–59

Windows System Configuration Definitions ...................... 4–60

Windows System Setup ................................................ 4–38

Windows® Software Upgrade Procedure ........................ 10–29

With Autocleaner, Pedestal Installation ........................... 2–27

Without Autocleaner, Pedestal Installation....................... 2–26